Furuno USA 9ZWRTR080 MARINE RADAR User Manual operators manual

Furuno USA Inc MARINE RADAR operators manual

UserManual.wiki >

Furuno USA >

9ZWRTR080 User Manual >

operators manual HTML Version

1. operators manual
2. OPERATORS MANUAL

operators manual

MARINE RADAR/ARPA

FAR-28x7 Series

FAR-21x7(-BB) Series

Your Local Agent/DealerYour Local Agent/Dealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho,9-52 Ashihara-cho,

Nishinomi

a, Ja

anNishinomi

a, Ja

Tele

hone :Tele

hone : 0798-65-21110798-65-2111

0798-65-42000798-65-4200

IRST EDITION :

IRST EDITION : JAN.JAN. 20042004

Printed in JapanPrinted in Japan

ll ri

hts reserved.

ll ri

hts reserved.

A2A2 :: JAN.JAN. 22,200422,2004

PUB.No.PUB.No. OME-35190OME-35190

*00014745200**00014745200*

(( DAMIDAMI )) FAR-2107/2807 SER.FAR-2107/2807 SER. * 0 0 0 1 4 7 4 5 2 0 0 ** 0 0 0 1 4 7 4 5 2 0 0 *

*OME35190A20**OME35190A20*

* O M E 3 5 1 9 0 A 2 0 ** O M E 3 5 1 9 0 A 2 0 *

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard

The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be

harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a

close distance while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting

antenna at a close distance.

Distances at which RF radiation levels of 100 and 10 W/m

exist are given in the table

below.

Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house,

your administration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna

revolution. This is possible. Ask your FURUNO representative or dealer to provide

this feature.

FAR-2827/2127 RTR-079 MG5436 XN12AF 0.80 m 11.20 m

FAR-2827/2127 RTR-079 MG5436 XN20AF 0.40 m 8.60 m

FAR-2827/2127 RTR-079 MG5436 XN24AF 0.20 m 5.80 m

FAR-2817/2117 RTR-078 MG40102 XN12AF 0.30 m 4.20 m

FAR-2817/2117 RTR-078 MG40102XN20AF 0.10 m 3.00 m

FAR-2817/2117 RTR-078 MG40102XN24AF -- 2.40 m

FAR-2137S RTR-080 MG5223F SN30AF

FAR-2137S RTR-080 MG5223F SN36AF

FAR-2827W RTR-081 MG5436 XN20AF

FAR-2827W RTR-081 MG5436 XN24AF

FAR-2837S RTR-080 MG5223F SN30AF

FAR-2837S RTR-080 MG5223F SN36AF

FAR-2837SW RTR-082 MG5223F SN30AF

FAR-2837SW RTR-082 MG5223F SN36AF

Distance to

100 W/m

point

Distance to

10 W/m

point

Model

TR unit Magnetron Antenna

XN12AF: 4 ft XN20AF: 6.5 ft XN24AF: 8 ft

SN30AF: 10 ft SN36AF: 12 ft

Or MAF1425B

FAR-2117/2127/2137S available in blackbox configuration.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

Do not open the equipment.

Only qualified personnel

should work inside the

equipment.

Turn off the radar power

switch before servicing the

antenna unit. Post a warn-

ing sign near the switch

indicating it should not be

turned on while the antenna

unit is being serviced.

Prevent the potential risk of

being struck by the rotating

antenna and exposure to

RF radiation hazard.

Wear a safety belt and hard

hat when working on the

antenna unit.

Serious injury or death can

result if someone falls from

the radar antenna mast.

Do not disassemble or modify the

equipment.

Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can

result.

Immediately turn off the power at the

ship's mains switchboard if water

leaks into the equipment or the equip-

ment is emitting smoke or fire.

Continued use can cause fatal damage to

the equipment.

WARNING

Use the proper fuse.

Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage

to the equipment or cause fire.

Keep heater away from equipment.

Heat can alter equipment shape and melt

the power cord, which can cause fire or

electrical shock.

Do not place liquid-filled containers

near the equipment.

Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid

spills into the equipment.

Do not operate the equipment with wet

hands.

Electrical shock can result.

Before servicing the radar, turn off

the appropriate external breaker.

Power is not removed from the radar simply

by turning off its power switch.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

iii

WARNING

No one navigational aid should be relied

upon for the safety of vessel and crew.

The navigator has the responsibility to

check all aids available to confirm

position. Electronic aids are not

a substitute for basic navigational

principles and common sense.

• This ARPA automatically tracks

automatically or manually acquired radar

targets and calculates their courses and

speeds, indicating them by vectors. Since

the data generated by the auto plotter

are based on what radar targets are

selected, the radar must always be

optimally tuned for use with the auto

plotter, to ensure required targets will not

be lost or unwanted targets such as sea

returns and noise will not be acquired

and tracked.

• A target does not always mean a land-

mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels

but can imply returns from sea surface

and clutter. As the level of clutter changes

with environment, the operator should

properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN

and GAIN controls to be sure target

echoes are not eliminated from the

radar screen.

CAUTION

The plotting accuracy and response of

this ARPA meets IMO standards.

Tracking accuracy is affected by the

following:

• Tracking accuracy is affected by course

change. One to two minutes is required to

restore vectors to full accuracy after an

abrupt course change. (The actual

amount depends on gyrocompass

specifications.)

• The amount of tracking delay is inversely

proportional to the relative speed of the

target. Delay is on the order of 15—30

seconds for high relative speed; 30—60

seconds for low relative speed.

The data generated by ARPA, AIS and

video plotter are intended for

reference only.

Refer to official nautical charts for

detailed and up-to-date information.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

To avoid electrical shock, do not

remove cover. No user-serviceable

parts inside.

WARNING LABEL

Warning labels are attached to the

equipment. Do not remove any label.

If a label is missing or damaged,

contact a FURUNO agent or dealer

about replacement.

WARNING

Radiation hazard. Only qualified

personnel should work inside scanner.

Confirm that TX has stopped before

opening scanner.

DISPLAY UNIT, PROCESSOR UNIT

Name: Warning Label (1)

Type: 86-003-1011-0

Code No.: 100-236-230

ANTENNA UNIT

Name: Radiation Warning Label

Type: 03-142-3201-0

Code No.: 100-266-890

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOREWORD ........................................................................................................ xi

PROGRAM NUMBER ........................................................................................ xiii

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.............................................................................. xiv

SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................... SP-1

RADAR OPERATION....................................................................................1-1

1.1

Turning on the Power................................................................................................. 1-1

1.2

Transmitter ON .......................................................................................................... 1-1

1.3

Control Unit................................................................................................................1-3

1.4

Main Menu................................................................................................................. 1-5

1.5

Operation Using the On-Screen Boxes...................................................................... 1-7

1.6

Cursor Menu............................................................................................................ 1-10

1.7

Monitor Brilliance ..................................................................................................... 1-11

1.8

Choosing the Display Mode ..................................................................................... 1-12

1.9

On-Screen Boxes and Markers................................................................................ 1-13

1.10

Tuning the Receiver................................................................................................. 1-15

1.10.1

Choosing the tuning method.......................................................................... 1-15

1.10.2

Initializing tuning............................................................................................ 1-15

1.10.3

Automatic tuning............................................................................................1-16

1.10.4

Manual tuning................................................................................................ 1-16

1.11

Aligning Heading with Gyrocompass........................................................................ 1-17

1.12

Presentation Modes................................................................................................. 1-18

1.12.1

Choosing presentation mode......................................................................... 1-18

1.12.2

Description of presentation modes ................................................................1-19

1.13

Entering Own Ship's Speed ..................................................................................... 1-22

1.13.1

Automatic speed input by log or GPS navigator ............................................1-22

1.13.2

Manual speed input....................................................................................... 1-23

1.14

Choosing the Range Scale ......................................................................................1-24

1.15

Choosing the Pulselength ........................................................................................1-25

1.15.1

Choosing pulselength.................................................................................... 1-25

1.15.2

Choosing pulselength.................................................................................... 1-26

1.16

Adjusting the Sensitivity........................................................................................... 1-27

1.17

Suppressing Sea Clutter.......................................................................................... 1-28

1.17.1

Choosing method of adjustment.................................................................... 1-28

1.17.2

Automatic adjustment by the A/C SEA control ............................................... 1-28

1.17.3

Manual adjustment of A/C SEA ..................................................................... 1-29

1.18

Suppressing Rain Clutter ......................................................................................... 1-30

1.18.1

Turning AUTO RAIN on or off ........................................................................1-30

1.18.2

Adjusting A/C RAIN .......................................................................................1-31

1.19

Interference Rejector ...............................................................................................1-32

1.20

Measuring the Range............................................................................................... 1-34

1.20.1

Turning range rings on/off.............................................................................. 1-34

1.20.2

Measuring range by the variable range marker (VRM) .................................. 1-35

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.21

Measuring the Bearing ............................................................................................ 1-37

1.21.1

Measuring the bearing .................................................................................. 1-37

1.21.2

Choosing true or relative bearing .................................................................. 1-39

1.22

Collision Assessment by Offset EBL........................................................................ 1-40

1.22.1

How to assess risk of collision by the offset EBL........................................... 1-40

1.22.2

Choosing point of reference for origin point of offset EBL.............................. 1-41

1.23

Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ............................................. 1-42

1.24

Setting a Target Alarm ............................................................................................. 1-43

1.24.1

How to set a target alarm zone ..................................................................... 1-43

1.24.2

Acknowledging the target alarm.................................................................... 1-44

1.24.3

Deactivating a target alarm ........................................................................... 1-44

1.24.4

Target alarm attributes .................................................................................. 1-45

1.25

Off-Centering the Display ........................................................................................ 1-46

1.26

Echo Stretch............................................................................................................ 1-47

1.27

Echo Averaging ....................................................................................................... 1-48

1.28

Target Trails............................................................................................................. 1-49

1.28.1

True or relative trails ..................................................................................... 1-49

1.28.2

Trail time....................................................................................................... 1-50

1.28.3

Trail gradation............................................................................................... 1-50

1.28.4

Resetting target trails .................................................................................... 1-51

1.28.5

Trail copy ...................................................................................................... 1-51

1.28.6

Trail level ...................................................................................................... 1-52

1.28.7

Canceling trails ............................................................................................. 1-52

1.29

Parallel Index Lines................................................................................................. 1-53

1.29.1

Displaying, erasing parallel index lines.......................................................... 1-53

1.29.2

Adjusting index line orientation, index line interval ........................................ 1-54

1.29.3

Index line bearing reference.......................................................................... 1-54

1.29.4

Choosing maximum number of index lines to display.................................... 1-55

1.29.5

Index line mode ............................................................................................ 1-55

1.30

Origin Mark.............................................................................................................. 1-56

1.30.1

Entering origin marks.................................................................................... 1-56

1.30.2

Origin mark stabilization................................................................................ 1-58

1.30.3

Deleting individual origin marks..................................................................... 1-58

1.31

Zoom....................................................................................................................... 1-59

1.32

Markers ................................................................................................................... 1-60

1.32.1

Heading marker and heading line ................................................................. 1-60

1.32.2

Stern marker ................................................................................................. 1-60

1.32.3

North marker................................................................................................. 1-60

1.32.4

Own ship symbol .......................................................................................... 1-61

1.33

Automatic Picture Setup According to Navigation Purpose...................................... 1-62

1.33.1

Choosing a picture setup option.................................................................... 1-63

1.33.2

Restoring default picture setup options ......................................................... 1-64

1.33.3

User-programmable picture setups............................................................... 1-65

1.34

Programming Function Keys ................................................................................... 1-67

1.34.1

Activating a function key ............................................................................... 1-67

1.34.2

Programming the functions keys................................................................... 1-67

1.35

Ship’s Position......................................................................................................... 1-71

1.36

Noise Rejector......................................................................................................... 1-72

TABLE OF CONTENTS

vii

1.37

Suppressing Second-trace Echoes.......................................................................... 1-73

1.38

Adjusting Brilliance of Screen Data.......................................................................... 1-74

1.39

Watch Alarm ............................................................................................................1-75

1.40

Setting Up Nav Data ................................................................................................ 1-76

1.41

Text Window Setup .................................................................................................. 1-78

1.42

Customizing Operation ............................................................................................ 1-80

1.43

Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 1-82

1.43.1

Alarm description...........................................................................................1-82

1.43.2

Outputting alarm signal.................................................................................. 1-84

1.44

Choosing the Antenna, Displaying Antenna Information........................................... 1-85

1.44.1

Choosing the antenna ................................................................................... 1-85

1.44.2

Displaying antenna information .....................................................................1-86

1.45

Cursor Data ............................................................................................................. 1-87

1.46

Performance Monitor ............................................................................................... 1-88

1.46.1

Activating, deactivating the performance monitor .......................................... 1-88

1.46.2

Checking radar performance ......................................................................... 1-88

1.47

Wiper....................................................................................................................... 1-90

1.48

Own Ship Symbol .................................................................................................... 1-91

1.49

Color and Brilliance Sets.......................................................................................... 1-92

1.49.1

Choosing color and brilliance set................................................................... 1-92

1.49.2

Presetting color and brilliance set.................................................................. 1-92

RADAR OBSERVATION ...............................................................................2-1

2.1

General...................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1

Minimum and maximum ranges....................................................................... 2-1

2.2

False Echoes.............................................................................................................2-3

2.3

SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)..................................................................2-5

2.3.1

SART description ............................................................................................2-5

2.3.2

Showing SART marks on the radar display ..................................................... 2-6

2.3.3

General remarks on receiving SART ............................................................... 2-7

2.4

RACON...................................................................................................................... 2-8

ARPA OPERATION .......................................................................................3-1

3.1

Usage Precautions .................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2

Controls for ARPA...................................................................................................... 3-2

3.3

Activating, Deactivating ARPA ...................................................................................3-3

3.4

Entering Own Ship's Speed ....................................................................................... 3-3

3.4.1

Echo-referenced speed input........................................................................... 3-3

3.5

Automatic Acquisition................................................................................................. 3-5

3.5.1

Enabling auto acquisition.................................................................................3-5

3.5.2

Terminating tracking of targets (including reference targets)............................ 3-6

3.6

Manual Acquisition..................................................................................................... 3-7

3.6.1

Setting manual acquisition conditions.............................................................. 3-7

3.6.2

Manually acquiring a target.............................................................................. 3-7

3.7

ARPA Symbols and ARPA Symbol Attributes ............................................................. 3-9

3.7.1

ARPA symbols................................................................................................. 3-9

3.7.2

ARPA symbol brilliance.................................................................................. 3-10

3.7.3

ARPA symbol color and size.......................................................................... 3-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS

viii

3.8

Displaying Target Data ............................................................................................ 3-12

3.8.1

Displaying individual target data.................................................................... 3-12

3.8.2

Target list ...................................................................................................... 3-14

3.9

Vector Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-16

3.9.1

Description of vectors ................................................................................... 3-16

3.9.2

Vector motion and length .............................................................................. 3-17

3.10

Past Position Display............................................................................................... 3-18

3.10.1

Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past position

plot interval................................................................................................... 3-18

3.10.2

Past position display attributes...................................................................... 3-19

3.11

Set and Drift ............................................................................................................ 3-20

3.12

Setting CPA/TCPA Alarm Ranges............................................................................ 3-21

3.12.1

Setting CPA/TCPA alarm ranges................................................................... 3-21

3.12.2

Acknowledging CPA/TCPA alarm.................................................................. 3-22

3.13

Setting a Guard Zone.............................................................................................. 3-23

3.13.1

Activating the guard zone.............................................................................. 3-23

3.13.2

Sleeping, deactivating a guard zone ............................................................. 3-24

3.13.3

Acknowledging the guard zone alarm ........................................................... 3-24

3.13.4

Guard zone reference ................................................................................... 3-25

3.13.5

Guard zone shape and stabilization .............................................................. 3-25

3.14

Operational Warnings.............................................................................................. 3-26

3.15

Trial Maneuver ........................................................................................................ 3-28

3.15.1

Types of trial maneuvers............................................................................... 3-28

3.15.2

Performing a trial maneuver.......................................................................... 3-29

3.15.3

Terminating a trial maneuver......................................................................... 3-31

3.16

ARPA Performance Test .......................................................................................... 3-32

3.17

Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking ................................................................ 3-34

3.18

Factors Affecting ARPA Functions ........................................................................... 3-36

AIS OPERATION...........................................................................................4-1

4.1

Controls for AIS ......................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2

Enabling/Disabling the AIS ........................................................................................ 4-2

4.3

Turning AIS Display On/Off........................................................................................ 4-3

4.4

Activating Targets ...................................................................................................... 4-4

4.4.1

Activating specific target ................................................................................. 4-4

4.4.2

Activating all targets........................................................................................ 4-4

4.5

Sleeping Targets........................................................................................................ 4-5

4.5.1

Sleeping an AIS target .................................................................................... 4-5

4.5.2

Sleeping all AIS targets................................................................................... 4-5

4.6

Displaying Target Data .............................................................................................. 4-6

4.6.1

Basic data....................................................................................................... 4-6

4.6.2

Detailed target data......................................................................................... 4-7

4.7

AIS Symbol Attributes................................................................................................ 4-8

4.7.1

AIS symbol brilliance....................................................................................... 4-8

4.7.2

AIS symbol size and color............................................................................... 4-9

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.8

Past Position Display ...............................................................................................4-10

4.8.1

Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past position

plot interval....................................................................................................4-10

4.8.2

Past position display attributes...................................................................... 4-11

4.9

Lost Target...............................................................................................................4-12

4.10

ROT Setting.............................................................................................................4-13

4.11

Fusion of ARPA and AIS Targets..............................................................................4-14

4.12

AIS System Messages.............................................................................................4-16

4.13

Viewing AIS Messages ............................................................................................4-17

4.13.1

Manually viewing received AIS messages .....................................................4-17

4.13.2

Automatically displaying AIS messages.........................................................4-18

4.13.3 Manually viewing AIS alarm messages..........................................................4-18

VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION....................................................................5-0

5.1

General......................................................................................................................5-0

5.2

Display Modes...........................................................................................................5-0

5.3

Presentation Modes...................................................................................................5-1

5.4

Radar Map.................................................................................................................5-2

5.4.1

Turning on the radar map display....................................................................5-2

5.4.2

Inscribing radar map marks and lines..............................................................5-3

5.5

Erasing Radar Map Marks and Lines.........................................................................5-5

5.5.1

Erasing individual radar map marks and lines .................................................5-5

5.5.2

Erasing all radar map marks and lines.............................................................5-6

5.6

Radar Map Corrections..............................................................................................5-7

5.6.1

Radar map correction......................................................................................5-7

5.6.2

Cursor data correction.....................................................................................5-7

5.7

Chart Cards ...............................................................................................................5-8

5.7.1

Displaying a chart............................................................................................5-8

5.7.2

Chart position correction..................................................................................5-9

5.7.3

Correcting cursor data.....................................................................................5-9

5.7.4

Chart land color.............................................................................................5-10

5.8

Hiding/Showing Graphics on the Video Plotter Display ............................................ 5-11

5.9

Track........................................................................................................................5-12

5.9.1

Plotting own ship’s track................................................................................5-12

5.9.2

Plotting other ships’ track...............................................................................5-13

5.9.3

Choosing track color......................................................................................5-13

5.9.4

Erasing track.................................................................................................5-14

5.10

Marks and Lines ......................................................................................................5-15

5.10.1

Inscribing marks and lines.............................................................................5-15

5.11

Erasing Marks and Lines .........................................................................................5-17

5.11.1

Erasing individual marks/lines .......................................................................5-17

5.11.2

Erasing all marks and lines............................................................................5-18

5.12

Waypoints................................................................................................................5-19

5.12.1

Entering waypoints........................................................................................5-19

5.12.2

Editing, erasing waypoints from the menu .....................................................5-22

5.12.3

Erasing waypoints .........................................................................................5-23

5.12.4

Waypoint list..................................................................................................5-24

5.12.5

Displaying waypoint name and number.........................................................5-25

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.13

Nav Lines ................................................................................................................ 5-27

5.13.1

Entering new nav line.................................................................................... 5-27

5.13.2

Editing nav lines............................................................................................ 5-28

5.13.3

Nav line list ................................................................................................... 5-29

5.13.4

Erasing nav lines .......................................................................................... 5-30

5.13.5

Setting up nav lines....................................................................................... 5-31

5.13.6

Displaying nav line, waypoint mark ............................................................... 5-33

5.14

Recording Data ....................................................................................................... 5-35

5.14.1

Initializing memory (RAM) cards ................................................................... 5-35

5.14.2

Recording data ............................................................................................. 5-36

5.15

Replaying Data........................................................................................................ 5-38

5.16

Deleting Files .......................................................................................................... 5-39

MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................6-1

6.1

Periodic Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................ 6-2

6.2

Life Expectancy of Major Parts.................................................................................. 6-3

6.3

Replacing the Fuse ................................................................................................... 6-3

6.4

Replacement of Battery on GC Board ....................................................................... 6-4

6.5

Trackball Maintenance .............................................................................................. 6-4

6.6

Easy Troubleshooting................................................................................................ 6-5

6.7

Advanced-level Troubleshooting................................................................................ 6-6

6.8

Diagnostics................................................................................................................ 6-9

6.9

System Messages................................................................................................... 6-12

APPENDIX ......................................................................................................AP-1

1. Menu Tree ...................................................................................................................AP-1

2. Digital Interface............................................................................................................AP-8

3. Parts Lists and Parts Location ...................................................................................AP-29

4. Longitude Error Table (on 96 nm range scale) ...........................................................AP-45

INDEX............................................................................................................... IN-1

FOREWORD

A Word to the Owner of the FAR-28x7/FAR-21x7(-BB)

Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FAR-28x7/FAR-21x7(-BB) Series Radar.

We are confident you will see why FURUNO has become synonymous with quality and

reliability.

For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for

innovative and dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is

furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers.

Your radar is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine

environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed,

operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended

procedures for operation and maintenance.

We would appreciate hearing from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our

purposes.

Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment.

Note: The example screens shown in this manual may not match the screens you see on

your display. The screen you see depends on your system configuration and

equipment settings.

Features

•

High-resolution 20.1-inch LCD (FR-21x7(-BB)) or 23.1-inch LCD (FR-28x7).

•

This series of radar and ARPA are available in the models shown in the table below. “BB”

means blackbox configuration (monitor to be supplied locally) is available.

X-band S-band

Model Output TR config. Model Output TR config.

FAR-2117(-BB) 12 kW UP FAR-2137S(-BB) 30 kW UP

FAR-2127(-BB) 25 kW UP FAR-2837S 30 kW

FAR-2817 12 kW

UP FAR-2837SW 30 kW DOWN

FAR-2827 25 kW

FAR-2827W 25 kW DOWN

FOREWORD

xii

•

Two types of trackball-equipped control units are available: RCU-014 (full keyboard) and

the RCU-015 (palm control). The trackball is easy to use thanks to the ergonomically

designed palm rest.

•

Simplified operation with point-and-click menu operation.

•

All functions are accessible by using the trackball alone.

•

Applicable to HSC (High Speed Craft)

•

ARPA (Automatic Radar Plotting Aid) + AIS, Radar Plotter and Interswitch supplied as

standard.

•

Meets the following requirements:

IMO MSC.64(67) Annex 4: Performance standards for Radar equipment

IEC 60936-1 (1999): Shipborne radar-Performance requirements

IEC 60936-1 Am. 1 (2002-06): Unwanted emissions of radar systems

IMO A.823 (19): Performance standards for ARPAs

IEC 60872-1 (1998): ARPA – Performance requirements

IMO A.820(19): Performance standards for navigational radar equipment for high speed

craft

IEC 60936-2 (1998): Radar for high speed craft – Performance requirements

IMO A. 694(17): General requirements for electronic navigational aids

IEC 60945 (2002-08): Maritime Navigational Equipment General Requirements

IEC 61162-1 and 2: Maritime navigation equipment-digital interface

IEC 60936-5: Guidelines for the use and display of AIS information on Radar

•

Guard alarm watches for targets entering or exiting the guard zone

•

TCPA/CPA alarms

•

Electronic parallel index lines

•

42 rpm antenna for high speed craft

xiii

PROGRAM NUMBER

PC Board Program No. Version No. Date of Modification

SPU 035-9204 01.**

RFC 035-9202 01.**

KEY(REMOTE) 035-9203 01.**

CARD 035-9209 01.**

** Program Version No.

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

With FURUNO-supplied monitor

ANTENNA UNIT

(Performance Monitor PM-51 built in)

TRANSCEIVER UNIT

RTR-082

For FAR-2837SW

FAR-2137S/2837S/2837SW

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

PSU-007

For FAR-2137S/2837S

PROCESSOR UNIT

RPU-013

FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2827W

Waveguide or

Coax cable

(For FAR-2837SW)

VDR

External Monitor

Sub Display

Alarm

MONITOR UNIT

MU-201CR

(FAR-21x7)

MU-231CR

(FAR-28x7)

CONTROL UNIT

RCU-014

(Keyboard)

RCU-015

(Trackball)

Control Unit

RCU-016

(Remote)

24 VDC

115/230 VAC

RU-3423

24 VDC

Navigator (INS, GPS, etc.)

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data

(Input/Output)

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data

(Input) Speed Log

Gyrocompass

AIS

HUB

Track Control Unit

AD-100

MEMORY CARD

INTERFACE UNIT

CU-200

TRANSCEIVER UNIT

RTR-081

For FAR-2827W

Waveguide

(For FAR-2827W)

: Option

: Dockyard supply

: Standard

Category of Units

Antenna unit: Exposed to weather

All other units: Protected from weather

ANTENNA UNIT

(Performance Monitor PM-31 built in)

Ship's Mains

24 VDC

100-115 VAC/

220-230 VAC

1φ, 50-60 Hz

Rectifier

RU-3424

RU-1746B-2

Transformer Unit

RU-1803

440 VAC

1φ, 50-60 Hz

DC spec

AC spec

100/110/115/

220/230 VAC

1φ, 50-60 Hz

For power for

antenna unit

see next page.

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Antenna unit

FAR-2117,

FAR-2117-BB

FAR-2127,

FAR-2127-BB,

FAR-2827,

RSB-096 (24 rpm)

RSB-097 (42 rpm)

FAR-2137S,

FAR-2137S-BB

RSB-098/099 (21/26 rpm, 200 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz; 220 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz; 380

VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz, 440 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz)

RSB-100/101/102 (45 rpm, 220 VAC, 3ø, 50/60 Hz(HSC);

440 VAC, 3ø, /60 Hz(HSC))

FAR-2827W RSB-103 (24 rpm, powered by processor unit)

FAR-2837S Same as FAR-2137S

FAR-2837SW RSB-104/105 (21/26 rpm, 200 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz; 220 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz; 380

VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz, 440 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz)

Radiator

FAR-2117, FAR-2117-BB

FAR-2127, FAR-2127-BB,

FAR-2827

XN12AF (4 ft), XN20AF (6.5 ft),

XN24AF (8 ft)

FAR-2137S, FAR-2137S-BB SN30AF (10 ft), SN36AF (12 ft)

FAR-2827W XN20AF (6.5 ft), XN24AF (8 ft)

FAR-2837S SN30AF (10 ft), SN36AF (12 ft)

FAR-2837SW SN30AF (10 ft), SN36AF (12 ft)

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

xvi

Blackbox type

ANTENNA UNIT

(Performance Monitor PM-51 built in)

FAR-2137S-BB

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

PSU-007

For FAR-2137S-BB

PROCESSOR UNIT

RPU-013

FAR-2117-BB/2127-BB

Sub Display

VGA

MONITOR

CONTROL UNIT

RCU-014

(Keyboard)

RCU-015

(Trackball)

Control Unit

RCU-016

(Remote)

AIS

HUB

Track Control System

MEMORY CARD

INTERFACE UNIT

CU-100

: Option

: Dockyard supply

: Standard

Category of Units

Antenna unit: Exposed to weather

All other units: Protected from weather

ANTENNA UNIT

(Performance Monitor PM-31 built in)

Ship's Mains

24 VDC

100-115 VAC/

220-230 VAC

1φ, 50-60 Hz

Rectifier

RU-3424

RU-1746B-2

Transformer Unit

RU-1803

440 VAC

1φ, 50-60 Hz

DC spec

AC spec

100/110/115/

220/230 VAC

1φ, 50-60 Hz

VDR

External Monitor

Alarm

Navigator (INS, GPS, etc.)

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data

(Input/Output)

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data

(Input) Speed Log

Gyrocompass

AD-100

FURUNO

FAR-21x7(-BB)/28x7 SERIES

SP - 1

SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR/ARPA

FAR-21x7(-BB)/28x7 SERIES

1. ANTENNA RADIATORS

1. Type Slotted waveguide array

2. Beam width and sidelobe attenuation

X-band S-band

Radiator type XN12AF XN20AF XN24AF SN30AF SN36AF

Length 4 ft 6.5 ft 8 ft 10 ft 12 ft

Beam width(H) 1.8° 1.23° 0.95° 2.3° 1.8°

Beam width(V) 20° 20° 20° 25° 25°

Sidelobe within ±10° -24 db -28db -28 db -24 db -24 db

Sidelobe outside ±10° -30 db -32 db -32 db -30 db -30 db

3. Polarization Horizontal

4. Rotation FAR-2117/2127/2827: 24 rpm or 42 rpm

FAR-2137S/2837S: 21/26 rpm or 45 rpm

FAR-2827W: 24 rpm

FAR-2837SW: 21/26 rpm

2. RF TRANSCEIVER

1. Frequency X-band: 9410 MHz ±30 MHz, S-band: 3050 MHz ±30 MHz

2. Output power FAR-2117/2817: 12 kW FAR-2127/2827/2827W: 25 kW

FAR-2137S/2837S/2837SW: 30 kW

Unwanted emissions comply with ITU-R RR.

3. Pulselength, PL, PRF and range

Pulselength S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L

PL (µs) 0.07 0.15 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.2

PRF (Hz) 3000* 3000* 1500 1000 1000 600**

Range scale

(nm) 0.125,

0.25, 0.5,

0.75, 1.5

0.5, 0.75,

1.5, 3 0.75, 1.5,

3, 6 3, 6, 12,

24 3, 6, 12,

24 6, 12, 24,

48, 96,

120#

*: 2200 Hz with ARPA on, 32 nm range **: 450 Hz on 96 and 120 nm ranges #: R-type only

4. IF 60 MHz

5. Noise figure 6 dB (typical)

6. Duplexer Ferrite circulator with diode limiter for

FAR-2117/2127/2137S/2817/2827/2837S

Ferrite circulator with TR limiter for FAR-2827W/2837SW

3. DISPLAY UNIT

1. Screen Yellow or green echoes in 32 levels. Rasterscan non-interlace at

48.3kHz horizontal, 60 Hz vertical. R-type has yellow or green

monochrome plus 3-color display according to echo strengths.

FAR-21x7 series FAR-28x7 series

Size, model 20.1-inch color LCD, MU-201CR 23.1-inch color LCD, MU-231CR

Display area (mm) 399.36 x 319.49 470.4 x 352.8

Resolution 1280 x 1024 pixels 1280 x 1024 pixels

Effective radar diameter 308 mm 340 mm

FURUNO

FAR-21x7(-BB)/28x7 SERIES

SP - 2

2. Minimum range and

range discrimination 35 m

3. Range scales (nm), 0.125 (.025), 0.25 (0.05), 0.5 (0.1), 0.75 (0.25), 1 (0.25)*, 1.5 (0.25),

ring interval 3 (0.5), 4 (1)*, 6 (1), 8 (2)*, 12 (2), 16 (4)*, 24 (4), 32 (8)*, 48 (8), 96

(16), 120 (20)* *: Non-IMO type only

4. Range accuracy 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 30 m, whichever is

the greater

5. Bearing discrimination Better than 2.5°

6. Bearing accuracy ±1°

7. Presentation mode Head-up, Head-up TB, North-up, Course-up, True Motion sea or

ground stabilization

8. Plotting facilities(ARPA) Auto or Manual acquisition: 100 targets in 0.2-32 nm

Auto tracking on all acquired targets

9. Radar map Nav lines, coastlines, buoys, etc. produced by operator. 3000 pts in

radar mode, 6000 pts on IC card in chart mode

10. Guard zone Two GZ anywhere

11. Parallel index line Choice of 2, 4 or 6 lines

12. AIS IMO SN Circ.217, IEC 60936-5

4. INTERFACE

1. IEC 61162-1 Ed. 2 RSD, TTM, AIS related data, etc.

2. Compass Built-in interface (option) for sync signal (20-135 V, 50-400 Hz), or

stepper signal (20-135 VDC), any polarity, for gyrocompass, GPS

compass SC-60/120 by IEC 61162-2

3. Speed log NMEA format data

4. Others Echo sounder, GPS navigator, water temperature, etc.

5. POWER SUPPLY

1. DC version 24 VDC, 15.4 A max

2. AC version 115/230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz, 270 VA

440 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz (S-band)

380 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz (S-band)

3. Input voltage Display unit

FAR-21x7: 24 VDC, 2.3 A; 100-230 VAC, 0.7A (100 V)

FAR-28x7: 24 VDC, 3.2 A; 100-230 VAC, 0.9 A (100 V)

Processor unit

FAR-2117/2817/2117-BB:

24VDC: 7.6A

/8.5A

, 100-115 VAC: 2.6A

/3.0A

220-230 VAC: 1.6A

/1.7A

FAR-2127/2827/2127-BB:

24 VDC: 8.8A

/9.7A

, 100-115 VAC: 3.0A

/3.4A

220-230 VAC: 1.8A

/1.9A

24 rpm,

42 rpm

FURUNO

FAR-21x7(-BB)/28x7 SERIES

SP - 3

6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

1. Ambient temperature (Complies with IEC 60945)

Indoor units -15°C to +55°C

Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C

2. Relative humidity 95% at 40°C

3. Waterproofing Antenna unit: IPX6 (IEC 60529)

Indoor units: IPX0 (IEC 60529)

4. EMC Full compliance with IEC 60945 Ed. 4

(to 2 GHz cabinet radiation)

Precautions for high speed targets

Assume your ship is making 40 kt and a target ship is approaching at 49 kt right toward you. Then

the relative speed is 80 kt. With the antenna rotating at 42 rpm, the target blip appearsjumping to a

new location 59 m nearer. This jump corresponds to 19 mm on the displayusing the 0.25 nm range

scale. On such a short range you may lose the track of a target in themidst of sea clutter, random

noise or other targets. Use one step larger range scale.

ARPA can fail to track a target when the relative speed exceeds 100 kt.

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-1

1 RADAR OPERATION

1.1 Turning on the Power

The [POWER] switch is located at the left corner of the control unit. Open the

power switch cover and press the switch to turn on the radar system. To turn off

the radar, press the switch again. The screen shows the bearing scale and

digital timer approximately 30 seconds after power-on. The

timer counts

down

three minutes of warm-up time. During this period the magnetron (transmitter

tube) is warmed for transmission. When the timer has reached 0:00, the

indication “ST-BY” appears at the screen center, meaning the radar is now ready

to transmit pulses.

In the stand-by condition, markers, rings, map, charts, etc. are not shown.

Further, ARPA is cancelled and the AIS display is erased.

In warm-up and stand-by condition, ON TIME and TX TIME counts in hours and

tenths of hour appear at the screen center.

1.2 Transmitter ON

After the power is turned on and the magnetron has warmed up, ST-BY appears

at the screen center, meaning the radar is ready to transmit radar pulses. You

may transmit by pressing the [STBY/TX] key on the full keyboard or roll the

trackball to choose the TX STBY box at the bottom left corner of the display and

then push the left button (above the trackball). The label at the left-hand side of

the guidance box at the bottom right corner of the screen changes from TX to

STBY.

Guidance

box

STBY

TX STBY box

Radar display

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-2

The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulse length. Other

settings such as brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs and menu option selections are

also set to previous settings.

The [STBY/TX] key (or TX STBY box) toggles the radar between STBY and

TRANSMIT status. The antenna stops in stand-by and rotates in transmit. The

magnetron ages with time resulting in a reduction of output power. Therefore, it

is highly recommended that the radar be set to stand-by when not used for an

extended period of time.

Quick start

Provided that the radar was once in use with the transmitter tube (magnetron)

still warm, you can turn the radar into TRANSMIT condition without three

minutes of warm-up. If the [POWER] switch has been turned off by mistake or

the like and you wish to restart the radar promptly, turn on the [POWER] switch

not later than 10 seconds after power-off.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-3

1.3 Control Unit

Two types of control units are available: Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)

and Control Unit RCU-105 (palm control).

ACQ

OFF

VRM

A/C SEAA/C RAIN

MODE

LINE

INDEX

OFF

CENTER

OFF

RESET

CU/TM

OFFSET

EBL

GAIN

TARGET

CANCEL

TARGET

DATA

RANGE

LIST

TARGET

ENTER

MARK

TIME

VECTOR

CANCEL

TRAILS

MODE

VECTOR

BRILL

EBL

OFF

ACK

ALARM

F3 F4

STBY

Trackball

Left button Right button

Wheel

Trackball

Module

EBL rotary control VRM rotary control

Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)

Trackball

Left button Right button

Wheel

Trackball

Module

Control Unit RCU-015 (palm control)

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-4

Control description

Control Description

Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)

POWER Turns the system on and off.

EBL and VRM rotary controls Adjust EBL and VRM, respectively.

EBL ON, EBL OFF Turns the EBLs on and off, respectively.

F1-F4 Execute menu short cut assigned.

ALARM ACK Silences audible alarm.

STBY TX Toggles between stand-by and transmit.

BRILL Adjusts display brilliance.

A/C RAIN Suppresses rain clutter.

A/C SEA Suppresses sea clutter.

GAIN Adjusts sensitivity of the radar receiver.

HL OFF Temporarily erases the heading line while pressed.

EBL OFFSET Enables, disables the EBL offset. In menu operation, switches

polarity from North to South and East to West and vice versa.

MODE Chooses presentation mode.

OFF CENTER Shifts own ship position.

CU/TM RESET • Moves own ship position in 75% radius in stern direction.

• Resets the heading line to 0° in course-up and true motion

modes.

INDEX LINE Turns index lines on and off.

VECTOR TIME Chooses vector time (length).

VECTOR MODE Chooses vector mode, relative or true.

TARGET LIST Displays ARPA target list.

CANCEL TRAILS Cancels all target trails. In menu operation it clears line of data.

ENTER MARK Enters marks; terminates keyboard input.

VRM ON, VRM OFF Turns the VRMs on and off, respectively

MENU Opens and closes the MAIN menu; closes other menus.

ACQ • Acquires a target for ARPA after choosing it with the

trackball.

• Changes a sleeping AIS target to an activated one after

choosing it with the trackball.

RANGE Chooses radar range.

TARGET DATA Displays target data for ARPA or AIS target chosen with the

trackball.

TARGET CANCEL Cancels tracking on ARPA, AIS or reference target chosen with

the trackball.

Control Unit RCU-015 (palm control)

POWER Turns the system on and off.

F1-F4 Execute menu short cut assigned.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-5

[MARK]

1 BACK

2 OWN SHIP MARK

OFF/ON

3 STERN MARK

OFF/ON

4 INDEX LINE BEARING

REL/TRUE

5 INDEX LINE

1/2/3/6

6 INDEX LINE MODE

VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL

8 EBL OFFSET BASE

STAB GND/STAB HDG/

STAB NORTH

9 EBL CURSOR BEARING

REL/TRUE

0 RING

OFF/ON

1.4 Main Menu

You may access the MAIN menu from the full keyboard or by using the trackball.

In later sections only the procedure for menu operation by trackball is given.

Main menu operation by keyboard

1. Press the [MENU] key. The MAIN menu appears in the text area at the right

side of the screen.

[MAIN MENU]

1 [ECHO]

2 [MARK]

3 [ALARM]

4 [ARPA AIS]

5 [PLOTTER]

6 [CARD]

7 [NAV DATA]

8 [NAV LINE WPT]

9 [CUSTOMIZE TEST]

Echo processing functions

Mainly turns markers on/off.

Sets guard alarm functions; outputs alarm signal.

Sets ARPA and AIS functions.

Chart and track functions

Memory card functions

Turns nav data on/off.

Processes nav lines and waypoints.

Customizes operation; executes diagnostics.

MAIN menu

2. Press the numeral key corresponding to the menu you wish to open. For

example, press the [2] key to open MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Press the numeral key corresponding to the

item you wish to set.

4. Consecutively press the same numeral key

pressed at step 3 to choose appropriate

option and then press the [ENTER MARK]

key to register your selection.

5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.

To clear a line of numeric data:

Use the [CANCEL TRAILS] key.

Switch between plus and minus,

North and South or East and West:

Use the [2] key.

Useful keys in menu operation

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-6

[MARK]

1 BACK

2 OWN SHIP MARK

OFF/ON

3 STERN MARK

OFF/ON

4 INDEX LINE BEARING

REL/TRUE

5 INDEX LINE

1/2/3/6

6 INDEX LINE MODE

VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL

8 EBL OFFSET BASE

STAB GND/STAB HDG/

STAB NORTH

9 EBL CURSOR BEARING

REL/TRUE

0 RING

OFF/ON

Main menu operation by trackball

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen. The

guidance box at the bottom right corner (see the illustration at the bottom of

the next page for location) now reads “DISP MAIN MENU.”

Menu box

2. Push the left button to display the MAIN menu.

[MAIN MENU]

1 [ECHO]

2 [MARK]

3 [ALARM]

4 [ARPA AIS]

5 [PLOTTER]

6 [CARD]

7 [NAV DATA]

8 [NAV LINE WPT]

9 [CUSTOMIZE TEST]

Echo processing functions

Mainly turns markers on/off.

Sets guard alarm functions; outputs alarm signal.

Sets ARPA and AIS functions.

Chart and track functions

Memory card functions

Turns nav data on/off.

Processes nav lines and waypoints.

Customizes operation; executes diagnostics.

MAIN menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose the menu you wish to open and then push the

wheel or the left button. For example, choose the 2 [MARK] menu and then

push the wheel or the left button.

MARK menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose item desired and then push the wheel or the left

button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose option desired and then push the wheel or the left

button to register your selection.

6. Push the right button to close the menu. (Several pushes may be necessary

depending on the menu used.)

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-7

1.5 Operation Using the On-Screen Boxes

All radar functions can be accessed by using the trackball alone. This is done by

choosing the appropriate on-screen box with the trackball and operating the

trackball module to choose item and option. (See paragraph 1.9 for location of all

on-screen boxes.) On-screen boxes come in two varieties: Function selection

and function selection w/pop-up menu. On-screen boxes of the latter type have

“►” at the right side of their boxes, as in the MARK box shown below.

To operate the radar using on-screen boxes, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to place the trackball marker inside the box desired.

Note: The trackball marker changes its configuration according to its location.

It is an arrow when placed outside the effective display and a cursor

(+) when inside the effective display. See the illustration on the next

page for further details.

For example, choose the MARK box, which is at the bottom left corner.

MARK

Mark type last

selected, mark

number

-> +

162.5 T 11.7 NM

Bearing and range from

own ship to origin mark

MARK box

When a box is correctly selected, its color changes from green to yellow

(default colors) and the guidance box at the bottom right corner shows

operational guidance. The operational guidance shows the function of the left

and right buttons, with a diagonal line separating the information. For the

MARK box, for example, the operational guidance is “MARK SELECT /

MARK MENU.” In this case you would push the left button to choose a mark

or push the right button to open the MARK menu.

Guidance box

MARK

SELECT

MARK

Function of left button

Function of right button

Arrow

For choosing

on-screen box

MARK

MARK Box

> +

Guidance box (Example: guidance for MARK box)

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-8

Trackball marker location and guidance box indication

The trackball marker is either a cursor (+) or an arrow ( ) depending

on whether it is within or outside the display area, respectively.

Further, the indication in the guidance box changes according to

trackball marker location.

Trackball marker is within

effective display area:

The trackball marker is

a cursor

Guidance box reads

"TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU."

In this condition you may access cursor-operated

functions, by hitting the left button for direct

selection of function or the right button to choose

desired functions from the CURSOR menu. For

further details about the CURSOR menu,

see paragraph 1.6.

Trackball marker is out of

effective display area

(incl. text area) and

not selecting a box:

The trackball marker is

an arrow

Guidance box reads

"JUMP CURSOR / DISP MENU."

Push the left button to choose the on-screen

box closest to the arrow or push the right

button to display the MAIN menu.

To choose boxes successively, push the wheel

when the guidance box reads as above.

Then, the nearest box is selected and marked

with the double-ended arrow ( ) and the

guidance box reads

"JUMP FORWARD / JUMP BACKWARD."

Hit the left button to go to the box below or

adjacent to the currently selected box or hit

the right button to go to the box above or

adjacent to the currently selected box.

Continue pushing a button to choose boxes

successively. This is convenient for operation

under heavy pitching and rolling. To cancel this

feature, push the wheel when the guidance box

reads as above.

2. Push the left button (or roll the wheel depending on the box) until the desired

option is displayed in the box.

Note: When you chose an on-screen box’s option by rolling the wheel, the

box and its contents turn red. This simply indicates that the chosen

setting is different from the currently active setting. To change the

setting, push the wheel or the left button. If neither the wheel nor the

left button is pushed within about 30 seconds after operating the wheel,

the previous setting is automatically restored.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-9

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

3. The pop-up menu attached to the MARK box is the MARK menu. To open

the menu, push the right button. The menu opens in the text area at the right

side of the screen.

MARK menu

Note: Any menu may be operated from the full keyboard or the trackball, or a

combination of the two in case of Control Unit RCU-014. Note that in

later sections only the procedure for menu operation by the

trackball is given.

4. Roll the wheel to choose item desired and then push the wheel or the left

button. Selected item is initially shown in reverse video and changes to

normal video and circumscribed when the wheel or the left button is pushed.

5. Roll the wheel to choose option desired and then push the wheel or the left

button. Selected option is initially shown in reverse video and changes to

normal video and circumscribed when the wheel or the left button is pushed.

6. Push the right button to close the menu. (On some menus several presses of

the right button are required to close the menu.)

* Not available

on IMO radar.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-10

[CURSOR MENU]

2 ↓

TARGET DATA & ACQ/

TARGET CANCEL/

ACQ/

REF MARK/

EBL OFFSET/

OFFCENTER

ZOOM/

MARK DELETE/

CHART ALIGN

8 ↑

1.6 Cursor Menu

Functions which require the use of the cursor, such as EBL offset and zoom,

may be activated directly from the guidance box or from the CURSOR menu,

either method with the cursor inside the effective display area. Below is the

procedure for choosing a cursor-related function from the CURSOR menu. In

later sections only the procedure for selection from the guidance box is given.

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor inside the effective display area.

2. Roll the wheel to show “TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU” in the

guidance box.

3. Push the right button to show the CURSOR menu.

CURSOR menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose “2” and then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose function desired and then push the wheel or the left

button.

Note: For operation from the keyboard, you may press the [2] key to choose

a function in top-to-bottom order or the [8] key to choose in reverse

order.

Cursor Menu item Description

TARGET DATA & ACQ ARPA: Acquires ARPA target; displays data for chosen

ARPA target.

AIS: Activates sleeping AIS target; display data for chosen

AIS target.

TARGET CANCEL ARPA: Cancels tracking on chosen ARPA target.

AIS: Sleeps chosen AIS target.

ACQ ARPA: Acquires chosen echo.

AIS: Activates chosen AIS target.

REF MARK Inscribes reference mark, for target-based speed input.

EBL OFFSET Offsets EBL, to measure range and bearing between two

targets.

OFF CENTER Shifts screen center to chosen location.

ZOOM Zooms chosen location.

MARK DELETE Deletes chosen mark (plotter mark, origin mark or

waypoint mark).

CHART ALIGN Aligns chart with radar picture.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-11

6. The guidance box shows “XX / EXIT.” (XX = function chosen). Roll the

trackball to place the cursor where desired.

7. Push the left button to execute the function selected at step 5.

8. To quit the function selected, push the right button when the guidance box

shows “XX / EXIT.” (XX = function chosen at step 5)

1.7 Monitor Brilliance

The brilliance of the entire screen should be adjusted according to lighting

conditions. Monitor brilliance should be adjusted before adjusting relative

brilliance levels on the BRILL menu to be explained later.

Note: The brilliance of a commercial monitor cannot be adjusted from the radar.

See the owner’s manual of the commercial monitor for how to adjust its

brilliance.

By keyboard

Operate the [BRILL] control on the control unit to adjust brilliance. Turn it

clockwise to increase brilliance; counterclockwise to decrease brilliance. Watch

the BRILL box (see illustration below) to know current brilliance level.

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the brilliance level indicator in the

brilliance level indication box at the bottom left corner of the screen.

BRILL1

Place arrow inside box

to adjust screen brilliance.

Brilliance bar

Shows brilliance level.

Brilliance level

Brillance, color set no.

(For details, see para. 1.50.)

Brilliance level indicator

2. Roll the wheel downward to increase brilliance or roll it upward to decrease

brilliance. The length of the brilliance bar increases or decreases with

operation of the wheel.

Note: If nothing appears on the screen at power-up when using Control Unit

RCU-015 (palm control) or when the radar is in stand-by, press and hold

down any key except the power switch for four seconds to automatically

set up for medium display brilliance.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-12

1.8 Choosing the Display Mode

This radar has two display modes: Radar and Radar + Plotter. Choose a display

mode as below. Note that a display mode cannot be chosen when the menu is

open.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the DISPLAY MODE box at the top of

the screen.

DISPLAY

XX*

* XX = display mode

(RADAR, +PLOTTER)

DISPLAY MODE box

2. Push the left button to choose appropriate mode:

RADAR: Radar picture

+PLOTTER: Radar picture + plotter picture (incl. chart)

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-13

1.9 On-Screen Boxes and Markers

HEAD UP TB RM

HDG

000.0 T

ANT 1 X-BAND

PULSE S1

PICTURE4

IR OFF

ES OFF

EAV OFF

AUTO RAIN

OFF

/1 DISPLAY

RADAR GAIN

SEA AUTO

RAIN

TUNE AUTO

0. 9ktDRIFT

000. 0°TSET

34°40. 649 N

135°18. 303 E

SPD

0.0kt BT

ARPA

AIS

OFF

0.0kt

COG

00.0 T

SOG

0.0kt

OS POSN

VECTOR TRUE 30M

PAST POSN REL 3M

CPA LIMIT 0. 5NM 22MIN

TARGET

LIST

CU/TM

RESET

ALARM

ACK

TARGET

DATA & ACQ CURSOR

GZ1

IL1

MARK

032. 0°T

190.0°T, 5.75NM

BRILL1

WATCH

11 : 28

OFF EBL1

>280.9°T<

EBL2

240. 8°R

STBY

5. 60NM

GZ2

ALARM1

ALARM2

VRM1

>3.682NM<

VRM2

5.221NM

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

OFF

MANU

North

Marker

Stern

Marker

TRUE TRAIL OFF

AIS DISP Box

ALIGN

Chart Align ON

DISP

Note: Speed, Set and

Drift values not shown.

GAIN Setting

A/C SEA Setting

A/C RAIN Setting

TUNING Setting

Position

MENU Box

AIS Message Arrival

Guidance

Box

WATCH Box

(Alarm watch

time)

EBL2 Box

EBL1 Box

TX/STBY Box

HL OFF Box

BRILL Box

MARK Box

Bearing and range to mark

IL (Index Line) Box

Index line orientation,

Index line interval

VRM2 Box

CPA LIMIT Box

PAST POSN Box

ARPA VECTOR Box

ARPA ACQ

MODE Box

SET and DRIFT Boxes

CURSOR DATA Box

DISPLAY MODE Box

RANGE Box

PRESENTATION MODE Box

ANTENNA Box

PULSELENGTH Box

PICTURE Box, Main Picture Settings

VRM1 Box

TRAIL MODE Box

ALARM Box

Guard Zone (GZ) Box

TARGET LIST

Box

Heading

Speed

Heading Marker

Heading

Line

Guard

Zone Cursor

No. 2

EBL

No. 1

EBL

No. 1

VRM

No. 2

VRM

Range

Rings

Index

Line

CU/TM

RESET,

ALARM ACK

Box

ZOOM or ARPA

DATA BOX

(See next page.)

ALERT BOX

(See next page.)

Origin Mark

Symbol

Log Speed

Course over Ground

Speed over Ground

34 40.00N

135 24.00E

DGPS

ZOOM, ARPA,

or AIS DATA BOX

(See next page.)

ARPA,

AIS DATA BOX

TRIAL OFF

Trial Maneuver (Elapsed time shown

when trial maneuver is active.)

Display screen

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-14

Guidance Box

ARPA, AIS Functions Box

GUARD ALARM, TIMER ALARM, GUARD ZONE,

LOST TRGT, CPA/TCPA, TARGET FULL(AUTO),

TARGET FULL(MAN), AZIMUTH, HEAD LINE,

TRIGGER, VIDEO, GYRO, LOG, EPFS, XTE,

ARRIVAL WPT, DEPTH,RECEIVE, other

ARPA TARGET

No. 42

BRG 25.5 T

RNG 3.4NM

T CSE 264.0 T

T SPD 12.3KT

CPA 2.9NM

TCPA 12.2MIN

BCR 1.7NM

BCT 20MIN

100

-30 20 10

DEPTH 22.30 m WIND 15.4 m/s

HDG

242.2 T

SPD

9.9kt BT

0.1kt

COG

30.2 T

SOG

10.2.2kt

OS POSN

34 40.00N

135 24.00E

DGPS

45.1 T Wind Speed and Angle

(True or Relative angle)

Electronic Position-fixing

System and position

Heading is TRUE

(variation-corrected gyro or

magnetic heading)

Speed data is LOG, MAN, etc.,

showing sensor and types.

CSE when water tracking mode is

selected.

STW when water tracking

mode is selected.

ARPA Target

Data

(see Chapter 3.)

Tide relative to North,

full scale 10 kt

Wind direction relative to

own ship heading, full

scale 100 kt.

Depth

Echogram

(See 1.40.)

Alert Box

(Warnings and Alert

Messages)

Current speed and direction

Water temperature, TTG

WPT no., range and bearing

to waypoint

Date, time

CURRENT 2.3kt 69.9

TEMP 16 C TTG 00:00:00

WPT001 6.5NM 35.2 R

DATE OCT/25/03 10:00 UTC

ARPA Target

Data (or

Zoom)

Zoom display appears

in nav data box when

nav data is turned off.

Data fields

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-15

[ECHO]

1 BACK

2 2

ECHO REJ

OFF/ON

3 TUNE INITIALIZE

4 PM

OFF/ON

5 SART

OFF/ON

6 WIPER

OFF/1/2

1.10 Tuning the Receiver

1.10.1 Choosing the tuning method

The tuning method can be selected with the TUNE box at the top of the screen.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the TUNE box (TUNE AUTO or TUNE MAN) at

the top of the screen.

TUNE AUTO

Place arrow inside box

to adjust tuning, when

TUNE MANU is selected.

Tuning method (AUTO or MANU)

Tuning bar

Tuning level

TUNE box

2. Push the left button or roll the wheel to display TUNE AUTO or TUNE MAN

as appropriate.

3. If you used the wheel to choose tuning method, push the wheel or the left

button to change setting.

1.10.2 Initializing tuning

Automatic tuning is initialized during the installation. However, if you feel that

automatic tuning is not working properly try re-initializing it as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the wheel or the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button.

ECHO menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 TUNE INITIALIZE.

4. Push the wheel or the left button to initialize automatic tuning. (For operation

from the keyboard, press the [ENTER MARK] key.) “WORK IN PROGRESS

– TUNE INITIALIZE appears in the Alert Box during the initialization.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-16

1.10.3 Automatic tuning

Choose automatic tuning following paragraph 1.10.1. The TUNE box shows

TUNE AUTO.

1.10.4 Manual tuning

1. Roll the trackball to choose the RANGE box at top left corner and then push

the left or right button as appropriate to choose the 48-mile range. Push the

left button to lower the range; the right button to raise the range.

2. Choose manual tuning following the procedure in paragraph 1.10.1.

3. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the tuning bar area in the TUNE box.

4. Roll the wheel to adjust tuning. The best tuning point is where the bar graph

swings maximum. The arrow below the bar graph shows tuning control

position; not the tuning condition.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-17

[HDG MENU]

1 HDG SOURCE

AD-10/SERIAL

2 GC-10 SETTING

000.0°

1.11 Aligning Heading with Gyrocompass

With connection of a gyrocompass, ship's heading is displayed at the right side

of the screen. Upon turning on the radar, align the on-screen GYRO readout with

the gyrocompass reading by following the procedure shown below. Once you

have set the initial heading correctly, resetting is not usually required. However, if

the GYRO readout looks wrong or the gyro alarm sounds, follow the procedure

below. Note that the FURUNO SC-60/120 does not require alignment on the

radar.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the HDG box at the top right corner of

the screen.

2. Push the right button to open the HDG menu.

HDG menu

3. Roll the wheel downward to choose GC-10 SETTING and then push the

wheel or the left button.

Note: If heading source selected is not suitable change it at 1 HDG SOURCE

to match your heading source.

4. Roll the wheel to set the heading. (For entry through the keyboard use the

numeric keys.)

5. Push the wheel to finish.

6. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-18

1.12 Presentation Modes

This radar has the following presentation modes:

Relative Motion (RM)

Head-up: Unstabilized

Head-up TB: Head-up with compass-stabilized bearing scale (True Bearing)

where the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading.

Course-up: Compass-stabilized relative to ship’s orientation at the time of

selecting course-up.

North-up: Compass-stabilized with reference to north

True Motion (TM)

North-up: Ground or sea stabilized with compass and speed inputs

1.12.1 Choosing presentation mode

By keyboard

Press the [MODE] key consecutively to choose presentation mode desired. The

PRESENTATION MODE box shows the current presentation mode. (See the

illustration below.)

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the PRESENTATION MODE box at

the top left corner of the screen.

HEAD UP RM*

* = Other modes:

HEAD UP TB RM, COURSE UP RM,

NORTH UP RM, NORTH UP TM

PRESENTATION MODE box

2. Push the left button to choose mode desired.

Loss of gyrocompass signal

When the compass signal is lost, “HEADING SET” appears in red at the gyro

readout, the presentation mode automatically becomes head-up, all ARPA and

AIS targets and map or chart are erased. After restoring the compass signal,

choose the presentation mode with the [MODE] key or the PRESENTATION

MODE box.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-19

1.12.2 Description of presentation modes

Head-up mode

The head-up mode is a display in which the line connecting own ship and the top

of the display indicates own ship’s heading.

The target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions

relative to own ship’s heading.

A short line on the bearing scale is the north marker indicating heading sensor

north. A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the north marker to

disappear and the readout to show ***.*° and the message HDG SIG MISSING

appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.

Heading Line

North Marker

Note: When display is off-centered,

the heading mark appears at 000 degrees.

Head-up mode

Course-up mode

The course-up mode is an azimuth stabilized display in which a line connecting

the center with the top of the display indicates own ship’s intended course

(namely, own ship’s previous heading just before this mode has been selected).

Target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions

relative to the intended course, which is maintained at the 0-degree position. The

heading line moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course change. This

mode is useful to avoid smearing of picture during course change.

Heading Line

North Marker

Course-up mode

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-20

Head-up TB (True Bearing) mode

Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the head-up mode. The

difference from normal head-up presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing

scale. The bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized. That is, it rotates in

accordance with the heading sensor signal, enabling you to know own ship’s

heading at a glance.

This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyro heading sensor.

If the gyro heading sensor fails, the bearing scale returns to the state of head-up

mode.

North-up mode

The north-up mode paints target pips at their measured distances and in their

true (heading sensor) directions from own ship, north bearing maintained at the

top of the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to the ship’s

heading. Requires heading signal.

If the compass fails, the presentation mode changes to head-up and the north

marker disappears. Also, the HDG indication shows ***.*°. And the message

HDG SIG MISSING appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.

Heading Line

North Marker

North-up mode

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-21

True motion mode

Own ship and other moving objects move in accordance with their true courses

and speed. In ground stabilized TM, all fixed targets, such as landmasses,

appear as stationary echoes. In the sea stabilized TM without set and drift inputs,

the landmass can move on the screen. Note that true motion is not available on

the 72 nm (non-IMO type only) or 96 nm range scale. If COG and SOG (both

over the ground) are not available on TM mode, enter the set (tide direction) and

drift (tide speed) manually referring to the Tide Table.

When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 75% of the radius of the

display, own ship position is automatically reset to a point of 75% radius opposite

to the extension of the heading line passing through the display center. You may

also reset the own ship symbol manually by pressing the [CU/TM RESET] key,

or roll the trackball to choose the CU/TM RESET box at the bottom right corner

of the display and then push the left button.

If the heading sensor fails, the mode is changed to the head-up and the north

marker disappears. The HDG readout shows ***.*° and the message HDG SIG

MISSING appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.

Heading Line

North Marker

True motion mode

Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170180190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350 000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170180190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

Heading

line

North

marker

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170180190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

(a) True motion

is selected (b) Own ship has reached a

point 75% of display radius (c) Own ship is automatically

reset to 75% of radius

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-22

[SPEED MENU]

1 SHIP SPEED

LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/

GPS/MANUAL/REF

2 MANUAL SPEED

0.0kt

3 SET/DRIFT

OFF/ON

1.13 Entering Own Ship's Speed

The ARPA and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed

input and compass signal. The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS

(SOG) or manually on the menu. Note that FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-90

provides COG and SOG.

1.13.1 Automatic speed input by log or GPS navigator

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the SPD box at the top right corner of

the screen.

2. Push the right button to display the SPEED menu.

SPEED menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 SHIP SPEED and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose the appropriate source for automatic speed input

and then push the wheel or the left button.

LOG (BT): Log, speed over ground (SOG). Note that a log cannot produce

BT (Bottom Tracking) speed in deep waters without set and drift

entry.

LOG (WT): Log, speed thru water (STW)

GPS: Speed input by GPS navigator

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

Notes on speed input

•

IMO Resolution A.823(19) for ARPA recommends that a speed log to be

interfaced with an ARPA should be capable of providing through-the-water

speed (forward speed).

•

Be sure not to choose a LOG option when a speed log is not connected. If the

log signal is not provided, the ship speed readout at the top of the screen will

be blank. In the event of a log error, enter speed manually.

•

Warning label SPD **.* and LOG appear if no log signal is present for 30 s

while the ship’s speed has been more than 5 kt.

•

With the serial speed inputs and SOG selection, if the type of data is changed

from SOG to STW the label SOG appears in red (at the upper right corner of

the display).

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-23

1.13.2 Manual speed input

If the speed log is not working, enter speed manually as below. In this case the

speed data type is shown as MANUAL and is speed thru water (STW). Manual

speed input is not available when the AIS feature is active.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the SPD box at the top right corner of

the screen.

2. Push the right button to display the SPEED menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 SHIP SPEED and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose MANUAL and then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MANUAL SPEED and then push the wheel or the

left button.

6. Roll the wheel to set speed. (For entry through the keyboard, use the

numeric keys.)

7. Push the wheel to finish.

8. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-24

1.14 Choosing the Range Scale

The selected range scale, range ring interval and pulselength are shown at the

upper left corner on the screen. When a target of interest comes closer, reduce

the range scale so that it appears in 50-90% of the display radius.

By keyboard

Use the [RANGE] key to choose range desired. Hit the “+” part of the key to

raise the range; the “-“ part to lower the range.

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to choose the RANGE box at the top left corner of the

screen. The guidance box shows “RANGE DOWN / RANGE UP.”

0.125

0.025

RANGE box

2. Push the left button to lower the range; the right button to raise the range.

You may also choose the range by rolling the wheel and then pushing it or

the left button.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-25

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT

OFF/1/2/3

2 ECHO STRETCH

OFF/1/2/3

3 ECHO AVERAGE

OFF/1/2/3

4 NOISE REJ

OFF/ON

5 AUTO STC

OFF/ON

6 AUTO RAIN

OFF/1/2/3/4

7 VIDEO CONTRAST

1/2/3/4/

A/B/C

8 [PULSE]

9 [CONDITION]

0 DEFAULT

1.15 Choosing the Pulselength

The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper-left position of the screen using

the indications shown in the table below.

Label and pulselength

Indication Pulselength (µs)

S1 (Short pulse 1) 0.07

S2 (Short pulse 2) 0.15

M1 (Medium pulse 1) 0.3

M2 (Medium pulse 2) 0.5

M3 (Medium pulse 3) 0.7

L (Long pulse) 1.2

Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys.

If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength settings, you may change

them as shown below.

1.15.1 Choosing pulselength

You can choose the pulselength for the 0.5 to 24 nm range scales as below.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.

Note: The PICTURE box sets up the radar picture according to expected

usage, such as harbor navigation, long range, short range, etc. For

further details see paragraph 1.33.

2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

PICTURE menu

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-26

[PULSE MENU]

1 BACK

2 0.5NM

S1/S2

3 0.75NM

S1/S2/M1

4 1.5NM

S1/S2/M1

5 3NM

S2/M1/M2/M3

6 6NM

M1/M2/M3/L

7 12-24NM

M2/M3/L

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [PULSE] and then push the wheel.

PULSE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose a range and then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose pulselength desired and then push the wheel or the

left button.

6. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1.15.2 Choosing pulselength

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PULSELENGTH box at the left side of the

screen. The guidance box shows “PULSE NARROW / PULSE WIDE.”

PULSE XX*

* XX = Pulse width setting

PULSELENGTH box

2. Push the left button to shorten the pulselength or the right button to widen the

pulselength. You may also choose the pulselength by rolling the wheel and

pushing it or the left button.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-27

1.16 Adjusting the Sensitivity

The gain control adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver.

The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen.

If you set up for too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other

hand excessive sensitivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may

be missed because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the

background noise on the display.

To adjust receiver sensitivity, adjust the gain control so background noise is just

visible on the screen.

By keyboard

While monitoring the gain level indicator at the top of the screen, operate the

[GAIN] control to adjust the sensitivity.

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the gain level indicator at the top of

the screen.

GAIN

Place arrow inside

window to adjust gain.

Level bar

GAIN level indicator

2. Roll the wheel downward to increase the gain or upward to decrease it. 100

levels (0-100) are available.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-28

1.17 Suppressing Sea Clutter

Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals

known as sea clutter. The higher the waves, and the higher the antenna above

the water, the further the clutter will extend. When sea clutter masks the picture,

suppress it by the A/C SEA control, either manually or automatically.

1.17.1 Choosing method of adjustment

1. Roll the trackball to choose SEA AUTO or SEA MAN (whichever is shown) at

the top of the display.

SEA AUTO

Place arrow inside window

to adjust A/C SEA.

A/C SEA adjustment

method (SEA AUTO or SEA MAN)

Level bar

A/C SEA level indicator

2. Push the left button to display SEA AUTO or SEA MAN as appropriate.

1.17.2 Automatic adjustment by the A/C SEA control

Auto A/C SEA allows for fine tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within ±20 dB.

Accordingly, with the bar reading set to 100, gain is not lowered to minimum as

with manual A/C SEA on close-in ranges. Further, the auto A/C SEA level is low

because the average value of the original input echo is low in areas where there

are no sea surface reflections. For example, when the ship is alongside a quay

and the radar picture shows echoes from both land and sea, you can observe

the size of echoes because the STC curve is different depending size of echoes.

Note: The auto A/C function can erase weak target echoes. Adjust the control

carefully, watching the display.

By keyboard

1. Choose SEA AUTO following the procedure in paragraph 1.17.1.

2. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, adjust the A/C SEA with the [A/C

SEA] control. 100 levels are available.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-29

By trackball

1. Choose SEA AUTO following the procedure in paragraph 1.17.1.

2. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the A/C SEA level indicator at the top

of the display.

3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, roll the wheel downward to

increase the A/C SEA or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are

available.

1.17.3 Manual adjustment of A/C SEA

The A/C SEA control reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where

clutter is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range

increases, so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea

clutter.

The proper setting of the A/C SEA should be such that the clutter is broken up

into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable. If the setting is set too

low, targets will be hidden in the clutter, while if the setting is too high, both sea

clutter and targets will disappear from the display. In most cases adjust the

control until clutter has disappeared to leeward, but a little is still visible

windward.

A/C SEA adjusted;

sea clutter suppressed

Sea clutter at

screen center

By keyboard

1. Choose SEA MAN following the procedure in paragraph 1.17.1.

2. Watching the A/C SEA level indicator at the top of the display, adjust the A/C

SEA with the [A/C SEA] control. 100 levels (0-100) are available.

By trackball

1. Choose SEA MAN following the procedure in paragraph 1.17.1.

2. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the A/C SEA level indicator at the top

of the display.

3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, roll the wheel downward to

increase the A/C SEA or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are

available.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-30

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT

OFF/1/2/3

2 ECHO STRETCH

OFF/1/2/3

3 ECHO AVERAGE

OFF/1/2/3

4 NOISE REJ

OFF/ON

5 AUTO STC

OFF/ON

6 AUTO RAIN

OFF/1/2/3/4

7 VIDEO CONTRAST

1/2/3/4/

A/B/C

8 [PULSE]

9 [CONDITION]

0 DEFAULT

1.18 Suppressing Rain Clutter

Use the AUTO RAIN and A/C RAIN to suppress rain clutter. AUTO RAIN

suppresses rain clutter in the picture and A/C RAIN suppresses clutter picked up

by the antenna.

1.18.1 Turning AUTO RAIN on or off

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.

2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

PICTURE menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 AUTO RAIN and then push the wheel.

4. Roll the wheel to choose AUTO RAIN setting desired. The higher the number

the greater the degree of rain clutter suppression. OFF turns off the AUTO

RAIN feature.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-31

1.18.2 Adjusting A/C RAIN

The vertical beam width of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even

when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain

clutter (rain, snow, or hail) in the same manner as normal targets.

The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control

does but rather in a longer time period (longer range). The higher the setting the

greater the anti-clutter effect. When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets,

adjust the A/C RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled

pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier.

A/C RAIN control

OFF

A/C RAIN control

adjusted

Appearance of rain clutter

Keyboard

Adjust the A/C RAIN with the [A/C RAIN] control.

Trackball

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor in the A/C RAIN level indicator at the top

right side of the display.

RAIN

Place arrow inside window

to adjust A/C RAIN,

Level bar

(Shows A/C RAIN level.)

A/C RAIN level indicator

2. While observing the A/C RAIN level indicator, roll the wheel downward to

increase the A/C RAIN or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are

available.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-32

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT

OFF/1/2/3

2 ECHO STRETCH

OFF/1/2/3

3 ECHO AVERAGE

OFF/1/2/3

4 NOISE REJ

OFF/ON

5 AUTO STC

OFF/ON

6 AUTO RAIN

OFF/1/2/3/4

7 VIDEO CONTRAST

1/2/3/4/

A/B/C

8 [PULSE]

9 [CONDITION]

0 DEFAULT

1.19 Interference Rejector

Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another shipborne radar

operating in the same frequency band. It is seen on the screen as a number of

bright spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usually curved

spoke-like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the picture.

Activating the interference rejector circuit can reduce this type of interference.

The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation circuit. It compares the

received signals over successive transmissions and suppresses randomly

occurring signals. There are three levels of interference rejection depending on

the number of transmissions that are correlated.

Interference

3. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.

4. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

PICTURE menu

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-33

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 INT REJECT and then push the wheel.

4. Roll the wheel to choose rejection level desired and then push the wheel or

the left button. “3” provides the highest degree of suppression.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-34

[MARK]

1 BACK

2 OWN SHIP MARK

OFF/ON

3 STERN MARK

OFF/ON

4 INDEX LINE BEARING

REL/TRUE

5 INDEX LINE

1/2/3/6

6 INDEX LINE MODE

VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL

8 EBL OFFSET BASE

STAB GND/STAB HDG/

STAB NORTH

9 EBL CURSOR BEARING

REL/TRUE

0 RING

OFF/ON

1.20 Measuring the Range

The range to a target may be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings,

with the cursor, or with the VRM.

Use the fixed range rings to obtain a rough estimate of the range to a target.

They are the concentric solid circles about own ship, or the sweep origin. The

number of rings is automatically determined by the selected range scale and

their interval is displayed at the upper-left position of the screen. Count the

number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the

range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the

nearest ring.

1.20.1 Turning range rings on/off

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen. The

guidance box at the bottom right corner (see the illustration at the bottom of

the next page for location) now reads “DISP MAIN MENU.”

2. Push the left button to display the MAIN menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 [MARK] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

MARK menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 0 RING and then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

6. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-35

1.20.2 Measuring range by the variable range marker (VRM)

There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you

can discriminate them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be

distinguished from each other by different lengths of dashes.

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

No. 1

VRM Target

blip

No. 2

VRM

VRM1

VRM2

>0.66NM<

1.18NM

Measuring range with VRMs

By keyboard

1. Press the [VRM ON] key to display either of the VRMs. Successively

pressing the [VRM ON] key toggles the active VRM between No. 1 and No. 2.

The currently active marker is enclosed with >.....<.

2. Operate the VRM rotary control to align the active variable range marker with

the inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the lower-right

corner of the screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance

when you operate the [RANGE] key or the RANGE box. This means that the

apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range

scale.

3. Press the [VRM OFF] key to erase each VRM.

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the VRM1 or VRM2 box, whichever

VRM you want to use.

VRM1

VRM2

VRM boxes

2. The guidance box reads “VRM ON/.” Push the left button to turn on the VRM.

The guidance box now reads “VRM SET L = DELETE /.”

3. Push the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the effective display

area. The guidance box now reads “VRM FIX / EXIT.”

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-36

4. Roll the trackball (coarse adjustment) or wheel (fine adjustment) to align the

active variable range marker with the inner edge of the target of interest and

read its distance at the lower-right corner of the screen. Each VRM remains

at the same geographical distance when you operate the [RANGE] key. This

means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the

selected range scale.

5. Push the left button to anchor the VRM and fix its readout, or push the right

button to return the VRM to its previous location (range).

6. To erase a VRM, choose the appropriate VRM readout box and then push

the left button until the VRM disappears from the screen.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-37

1.21 Measuring the Bearing

Use the Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) to take bearings of targets. There are

two EBLs, No. 1 and No. 2. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending out

from the own ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture. The fine

dashed line is the No. 1 EBL and the coarse dashed one is the No. 2 EBL.

1.21.1 Measuring the bearing

By keyboard

1. Press the [EBL ON] key to display either of the EBLs. Successive presses of

the [EBL ON] key toggle the active EBL between No. 1 and No. 2. The

currently active marker is enclosed with >.....<.

2. Operate the EBL rotary control clockwise or counterclockwise until the active

EBL bisects the target of interest, and read its bearing at the lower-left corner

of the screen.

Note: Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at

right angles and its distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the

VRM readout whether or not the corresponding VRM is displayed. The

range marker changes its position along the EBL with the rotation of

the VRM control.

3. Press the [EBL OFF] key to erase each EBL.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-38

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the EBL1 or EBL2 box, whichever EBL

you want to use.

EBL1

EBL2

EBL boxes

2. The guidance box reads “EBL ON/.” Push the left button to turn on the EBL.

The guidance box now reads “EBL SET L=DELETE /.”

3. Push the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the effective display

area. The guidance box now reads “EBL FIX L=DELETE/.”

4. Roll the trackball (coarse adjustment) or wheel (fine adjustment) to bisect the

target with the EBL.

Note: Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at

right angles and its distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the

VRM readout whether or not the corresponding VRM is displayed. The

range marker changes its position along the EBL with the rotation of

the VRM.

5. Push the left button to anchor the EBL and fix its readout, or push the right

button to return the EBL to its previous location (bearing).

6. To erase an EBL, choose the appropriate EBL readout box and then push the

left button until the EBL disappears from the screen.

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

No. 2

EBL

Target

blip

No. 1

EBL

Range markers

on EBLs

VRM1

VRM2

12.1NM

EBL1

EBL2

>128.0 T<

100.8 T>10.2NM<

Measuring bearing with EBLs

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-39

[MARK]

1 BACK

2 OWN SHIP MARK

OFF/ON

3 STERN MARK

OFF/ON

4 INDEX LINE BEARING

REL/TRUE

5 INDEX LINE

1/2/3/6

6 INDEX LINE MODE

VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL

8 EBL OFFSET BASE

STAB GND/STAB HDG/

STAB NORTH

9 EBL CURSOR BEARING

REL/TRUE

0 RING

OFF/ON

1.21.2 Choosing true or relative bearing

The EBL readout is affixed by “R.” (relative) if it is relative to own ship's

heading, ”T.” (true) if it is referenced to the north. You may choose relative or true

in the head-up modes; in all other modes it is always TRUE.

To choose bearing reference in the head-up mode, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button to

open the MAIN menu.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button

to open the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING and then push the

wheel or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose REL or TRUE as appropriate and then push the

wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

Note: When the gyrocompass heading changes, the EBL and its indication

change as follows:

Head-up, relative: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.

Head-up, true: EBL indication remains the same; EBL moves.

Course-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.

North-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-40

1.22 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL

The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable

measurement of range and bearing between any targets. This function is also

useful for assessment of the potential risk of collision. It is possible to read CPA

(Closest Point of Approach) by using a VRM as shown below (Figure (a)). If the

EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated (Figure (b)), the

target ship is on a collision course.

1.22.1 How to assess risk of collision by the offset EBL

By keyboard

1. Press the [EBL ON] key to display or activate an EBL (No. 1 or No. 2).

2. Place the cursor (+) on a target appearing as threatening (A in the illustrated

example on the next page) by operating the trackball.

3. Press the [EBL OFFSET] key, and the origin of the active EBL shifts to the

cursor position. Press the [EBL OFFSET key] again to anchor the EBL origin.

4. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL rotary

control until the EBL bisects the target at the new position (A'). The EBL

readout shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative

depending on the EBL bearing reference setting.

Note: If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using a

VRM as shown in left-hand figure at the top of the next page. If the

EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the

right-hand figure at the top of then next page, the target ship is on a

collision course.

5. To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, press the [EBL OFFSET]

key twice.

By trackball

1. Display an EBL, following steps 1-3 in “By trackball” in paragraph 1.21.1.

2. With the cursor inside the effective display area, push the left button, roll the

wheel to show “EBL OFFSET / EXIT” in the guidance box and then push the

left button.

3. Roll the trackball to place the offset EBL on a target appearing as threatening

(A in the illustrated example on the next page) and then push the left button

to anchor the EBL origin.

4. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL used in

step 1 until it bisects the target at the new position (A'). The EBL readout

shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative depending on

the EBL bearing reference setting.

To return the EBL origin to the screen center, show “EBL OFFSET / EXIT” in the

guidance window and then push the left button.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-41

[MARK]

1 BACK

2 OWN SHIP MARK

OFF/ON

3 STERN MARK

OFF/ON

4 INDEX LINE BEARING

REL/TRUE

5 INDEX LINE

1/2/3/6

6 INDEX LINE MODE

VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL

8 EBL OFFSET BASE

STAB GND/STAB HDG/

STAB NORTH

9 EBL CURSOR BEARING

REL/TRUE

0 RING

OFF/ON

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

No. 1

EBL

No. 1

EBL

EBL1

>150.3 T<

VRM1

>3.85NM<

EBL1

>138.2 T<

VRM1

>3.85NM<

(a) (b)

Collision assessment by offset EBL

1.22.2 Choosing point of reference for origin point of offset EBL

The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed)

or referenced to own ship’s heading (relative).

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button

to display the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 EBL OFFSET BASE and then push the wheel or

the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose STAB GND, STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as

appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-42

1.23 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two

Targets

By keyboard

1. Press the [EBL OFFSET] key. Operate the trackball to place the origin of the

No. 1 EBL, for example, on a target of interest (target 1 in the illustrated

example).

2. Operate the EBL rotary control until the EBL passes through another target of

interest (target 2).

3. Operate the VRM rotary control until the range marker on the EBL is on the

inside edge of target 2. The active VRM readout at the lower-right corner of

the screen indicates the distance between the two targets.

4. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and

4) by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM.

Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix “R” or as a true bearing with

suffix “T” depending on EBL relative/true settings of EBL CURSOR BEARING in

the MARK menu. To return the EBL origin to the screen center, press the [EBL

OFFSET] key again.

By trackball

1. Display an EBL, following steps 1-3 in “By trackball” in paragraph 1.21.1.

2. With the cursor inside the effective display area, push the left button, roll the

wheel to show “EBL OFFSET / EXIT” in the guidance box and then push the

left button.

3. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on target 1 and then push the wheel.

4. Operate the No. 1 VRM until the range marker on the EBL aligns with target 2.

The active VRM readout at the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the

distance between the two targets.

5. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and

4) by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM.

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

EBL

origin

Target 2

No.1

EBL

No. 2

EBL

Range

Marker

Range/bearing

between targets

1 and 2

Range/bearing

between targets 3 and 4

EBL1

EBL2

>140.0 R<

335.2 R

VRM1

VRM2

>0.50NM<

0.98NM

Range

Marker

Target 4

Target 3

Target 1

Measuring range and bearing between two targets

To return the EBL origin to the screen center, show “EBL OFFSET / EXIT” in the

guidance window and then push the left button.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-43

1.24 Setting a Target Alarm

The target alarm serves to alert the navigator to targets (ships, landmasses, etc.)

entering a set area, with audible and visual alarms.

The guard alarm zone has a fixed

width of 0.5 nm in the radial direction

(depth) and is adjustable from 3.0 to

6.0 nm (guard zone 1) and any

distance (guard zone 2). On the

Non-IMO radar the boundaries can be

set at any distance. On any radar type

the sector of the zone can be set from

0 to 360 degrees in any direction.

1.24.1 How to set a target alarm zone

The procedure which follows shows how to set a target alarm zone using the

figure below as an example.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the ALARM1 or ALARM2 box, whichever alarm

you wish to set.

ALARM 1

ALARM 2

ALARM boxes

2. Push the left button. The cursor jumps into the effective display area and

“SET” appears inside the ALARM box chosen.

3. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on point “A” and then push the left

button.

4. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on point “B” and then push the left

button. “WORK” replaces “SET” in the ALARM box. The guard alarm zone’s

lines are dashed and blue.

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

Guard alarm zone

Target alarm zone

CAUTION

• The alarm should not be relied upon as

the sole means for detecting possible

collision situations.

• A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls

should be properly adjusted to be sure

the alarm system does not overlook

target echoes.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-44

Note 1: If you wish to create a target alarm zone having a 360-degree coverage

around own ship, set point “B” in almost the same direction as point “A.”

Note 2: Two target alarm zones may be set. Note however that the 2

target

alarm zone is available only when the 1

target alarm zone is active.

Note 3: When the target alarm zone is not within the range in use the indication

UP RNG appears to the right of the ALARM box. In this case choose a

range which will display the target alarm zone.

1.24.2 Acknowledging the target alarm

A target in the target alarm zone produces both visual (flashing) and audible

(beep) alarms. To silence the audible alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the

full keyboard or choose the appropriate ALARM box and then push the left

button. The ALARM box shows “ALARMx ACK.” This will deactivate the audible

alarm but will not stop the flashing of the offending target. To reactivate the

audible alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key again or choose the ALARM box and

then push the left button. (When an external buzzer is connected, the audible

alarm does not stop until the alarm zone itself is deactivated.) The ALARM box

shows “ALARMx WORK.”

1.24.3 Deactivating a target alarm

1. Roll the trackball to choose the ALARM1 or ALARM2 box, whichever alarm

you wish to deactivate.

2. Push the left button until the alarm status in the ALARM box disappears. In

the IMO-type radar deactivation of the target alarm zone 1 deactivates target

alarm zone 2. Target alarm zones 1 and 2 work independent on the Non-IMO

radar.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-45

[ALARM]

1 BACK

2 GUARD ALARM MODE

IN/OUT

3 GUARD ALARM LEVEL

1/2/3/4

4 WATCH ALARM

OFF/6M/10M/

12M/15M/20M

5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL

LOW/MID/HIGH

6 [ALARM OUT1]

7 [ALARM OUT2]

8 [ALARM OUT3]

1.24.4 Target alarm attributes

You may choose the echo strength level which triggers the alarm, the condition

which generates the target alarm and the volume of the audible alarm as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 [ALARM] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

ALARM menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 GUARD ALARM MODE and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose IN (guard zone) or OUT (anchor watch) as

appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button.

Inward target alarm Outward target alarm

Alarm types

6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 GUARD ALARM LEVEL and then push the wheel

or the left button.

7. Roll the wheel to choose echo strength level which will trigger the alarm and

then push the wheel or the left button. “4” is highest strength.

8. Roll the wheel to choose 5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL and then push the wheel

or the left button.

9. Roll the wheel to choose audible alarm volume, from among LOW, MID and

HIGH, and then push the wheel or the left button.

Note: 5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL also sets the level of the audible alarm for

the watch alarm.

10. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-46

1.25 Off-Centering the Display

Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field

without switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered

to the cursor position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is

set beyond 75% of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the

point of 75% of the limit.

This feature is not available on the 72 nm (Non-IMO type only) or 96 nm range

scale nor in the true motion mode.

To off-center the radar picture, do the following:

By keyboard

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor at a position where you wish to move the

sweep origin.

2. Press the [OFF CENTER] key. Then, the sweep origin is off-centered to the

cursor position.

3. To cancel off-centering, press the [OFF CENTER] key again.

By trackball

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“OFF CENTER / EXIT” in the guidance box and then push the wheel or the

left button.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor where you want to locate the screen

center.

3. Push the left button to off center the sweep origin.

4. To cancel the off-center function, push the left button when the guidance box

reads “OFF CENTER / EXIT.”

Cursor

Place cursor where desired

and execute appropriate

OFF CENTER procedure

Off-centered display

How to off-center the display

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-47

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT

OFF/1/2/3

2 ECHO STRETCH

OFF/1/2/3

3 ECHO AVERAGE

OFF/1/2/3

4 NOISE REJ

OFF/ON

5 AUTO STC

OFF/ON

6 AUTO RAIN

OFF/1/2/3/4

7 VIDEO CONTRAST

1/2/3/4/

A/B/C

8 [PULSE]

9 [CONDITION]

0 DEFAULT

1.26 Echo Stretch

The echo stretch feature enlarges targets to make them easier to see, and it is

available on the 1.5 -12 nm ranges depending on echo stretch type. There are 3

settings: ES1 to enlarge in bearing direction for long range detection, ES2 to

enlarge in range direction and ES3 to enlarge in bearing and range directions.

Echo Stretch 1 Echo Stretch 2 Echo Stretch 3

Bearing

direction

Range

direction

Echo Stretch OFF

Target

Bearing

direction

Range

direction

Use on range

1.5 - 12 nm Use on range

1.5 - 6 nm

Echo stretch

Note 1: If the 1.5 nm is preset with a pulselength of S1 or S2, and the 3 nm

scale with S2, the echo stretch is not available on those range scales.

Note 2: The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns

(clutter) from sea surface, rain and radar interference. For this reason,

make sure these types of interference have been sufficiently

suppressed before activating the echo stretch.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the display.

2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

PICTURE menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 ECHO STRETCH and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose desired echo stretch and then push the left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-48

1.27 Echo Averaging

The echo average feature effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received

from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same

position every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such

as sea clutter appear at random positions.

To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over

successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its

normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in

reduced brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.

Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the

true motion over the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such

as buoys will be shown while suppressing random echoes such as sea clutter.

True echo average is not however effective for picking up small targets running

at high speeds over the ground.

Note 1: Do not use the echo average function under heavy pitching and rolling;

loss of target detection can result.

Note 2: Echo average can be used without a heading sensor. For further details,

contact your dealer.

To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress

sea clutter with the A/C SEA control. Then, do as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the display.

2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ECHO AVERAGE and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF, 1, 2 or 3 as appropriate and then push the

wheel or the left button.

OFF: Echo averaging OFF

1: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppress brilliance of

unstable echoes.

2: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.

3: Stably displays distant target.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-49

[TRAIL MENU]

1 TRAIL MODE

REL/TRUE/

2 TRAIL GRAD

SINGLE/MULTI

4 TRAIL LEVEL

1/2/3/4

5 TRAIL RESTART

OFF/ON

6 TRAIL COPY

OFF/ON

7 OS TRAIL

OFF/ON

1.28 Target Trails

The trails of the radar echoes of targets may be displayed in the form of

synthetic afterglow. Target trails are chosen either relative or true and may be

sea or ground stabilized. True motion trails require a compass signal and own

ship speed input.

1.28.1 True or relative trails

You may display echo trails in true or relative motion (only true trail on TM).

Relative trails show relative movements between targets and own ship. True

motion trails require a gyrocompass signal and own ship speed input to cancel

out own ship's movement and present true target movements in accordance with

their over-the-ground speeds and courses.

(a) True target trails

(No smearing of

stationary targets)

(b) Relative target trails

Targets moving relative

to own ship

Target trails

Note: When true trail is selected on the RM mode, the TRAIL MODE box is

shown in red. No true-relative selection on TM; it is only True trails on TM

mode.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom

right corner of the screen and then push the right button to open the TRAIL

menu.

TRAIL menu

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-50

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 TRAIL MODE and then push the wheel.

3. Roll the wheel to choose TRUE or REL appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

4. Push the right button to close the menu.

Note: “TRUE TRAIL” is shown in red when a relative motion presentation mode

is used.

1.28.2 Trail time

Trail time, the trail plotting interval, may be chosen as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom

right corner of the screen.

* TRAIL **

* = TRUE or REL

** = Trail time setting

TRAIL MODE box

2. Push the left button to choose plotting interval from among OFF, 15 s, 30 s, 1

min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min, 30 min or CONT(INUOUS) and then push the

wheel. (To choose intervals between 30 s and 30 min, in increments of 30

seconds, roll the wheel.) The longer the trail interval the longer the length of

the target trail.

The maximum time for continuous plotting is 99:59. When the timer counts to

99:59, the timer is reset to zero, all target trails are erased and then trails are

restarted.

1.28.3 Trail gradation

•

The afterglow can be selected in a single tone or gradual shading.

Monotone

(Single) Gradual shading

(Multi)

Trail gradation

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom

right corner of the screen.

2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 TRAIL GRAD and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose SINGLE (single) or MULTI (multiple) as appropriate

and then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-51

1.28.4 Resetting target trails

You may clear all target trails to restart the trail process. Target trails are cleared

and the trailing process restarts from time count zero at the current target trail

plot interval.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom

right corner of the screen.

2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 TRAIL RESTART and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON or OFF as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

ON: Trails start extending on the newly selected range.

OFF: Trails are shown and extend only on the range where they were

initiated.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1.28.5 Trail copy

Trails are canceled and restarted whenever the range is changed. However, you

may continue trails on the same range, without restarting them, when the range

is changed to a next larger or smaller range scale. Note however that when the

range is changed, only those trails within the previous range are continued; no

trails are generated for targets outside the previous range.

(a) Previous range (b) New range

No trail generated

for target not within

previous range

Trail copy

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom

right corner of the screen.

2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 TRAIL COPY and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON or OFF as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-52

1.28.6 Trail level

The level (intensity) of the afterglow which extends from radar targets may be

chosen as below.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom

right corner of the screen.

2. Push the right button to display the TRAIL menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 TRAIL LEVEL and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose level desired and then push the wheel or the left

button. The higher the number the greater the intensity of the afterglow.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1.28.7 Canceling trails

Trails can be canceled as follows:

By keyboard

Press the [CANCEL TRAILS] key.

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom

right corner of the screen.

2. Push the left button to display OFF.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-53

1.29 Parallel Index Lines

Parallel index lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship

and a coastline or a partner ship when navigating. Two index lines are available

and any two may be displayed. You may control the orientation and line interval.

Index

lines

Parallel index lines

1.29.1 Displaying, erasing parallel index lines

By keyboard

1. With the menu closed, press the [INDEX LINE] key. The guidance box shows

“DISP INDEX LINE/.”

2. While watching the IL (Index Line) box at the left side of the screen, press the

[INDEX LINE] key to choose the index line number (IL1 or IL2) to display (or

erase). Press down the key again to display (or erase) the index line chosen.

Index line number Status (ON or OFF)

IL 1

032.0 T

5.60NM

Index line orientation,

Index line interval

(Neither shown when

Index line is OFF.)

IL (Index Line) box

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the IL box at the lower left-hand side of

the screen. (See the illustration above.)

2. Roll the wheel to choose index line number and then push the left button or

the wheel to turn the index line on or off as appropriate.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-54

[MARK]

1 BACK

2 OWN SHIP MARK

OFF/ON

3 STERN MARK

OFF/ON

4 INDEX LINE BEARING

REL/TRUE

5 INDEX LINE

1/2/3/6

6 INDEX LINE MODE

VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL

8 EBL OFFSET BASE

STAB GND/STAB HDG/

STAB NORTH

9 EBL CURSOR BEARING

REL/TRUE

0 RING

OFF/ON

1.29.2 Adjusting index line orientation, index line interval

1. Display the index line for which you want to adjust its orientation, referring to

paragraph 1.29.1.

2. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the index line orientation setting

window, directly below the IL box.

IL 1 ON

032.0 T

5.60NM

Index line orientation

Index line interval

Index line data

3. Roll the wheel to adjust the index line orientation, between 000.0-359.9(°T).

4. Roll the trackball to place the cursor in the index line interval setting window.

5. Roll the wheel to adjust the index line interval.

1.29.3 Index line bearing reference

Index line bearing reference may be relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or

referenced to North (True) as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button

to display the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 INDEX LINE BEARING and then push the wheel

or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose TRUE or REL as appropriate and then push the

wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-55

1.29.4 Choosing maximum number of index lines to display

The maximum number of index lines to display may be chosen from 2, 3 or 6

lines as below. The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line

interval.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button

to display the MARK menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 INDEX LINE and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose 1, 2, 3 or 6 as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1.29.5 Index line mode

Index lines orientation may be chosen from horizontal or vertical. This function is

available when 5 INDEX LINE in the MARK menu is set for other than “1”.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK and then push the wheel or the left button

to display the MARK menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 INDEX LINE MODE and then push the wheel or

the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose VERTICAL or HORIZONTAL as appropriate and

then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-56

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

1.30 Origin Mark

You can mark any prominent target or a point of particular interest using the

origin mark feature. Twenty origin marks may be entered: 10 standard origin

marks (with number) and one each of the 10 symbol origin marks. The marks

may be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or sea stabilized. To display the

origin marks, heading signal and own ship position data are required.

1.30.1 Entering origin marks

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the screen. The

guidance box now reads “MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”

MARK

Mark type last

selected, mark

number

-> +

162.5 T 11.7 NM

Bearing and range from

own ship to origin mark

MARK box

2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK KIND and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose ORIGIN MARK(No.) or ORIGIN MARK(SYM) as

appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button. Choose ORIGIN

MARK(No.) to inscribe standard origin mark ( ) plus mark number; ORIGIN

MARK(SYM) to inscribe desired origin mark symbol (no number).

5. Push the left button.

6. Push the right button to close the menu. The guidance box now reads

“MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”

* Not available

on IMO radar.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-57

7. With the cursor choosing the MARK box, roll the wheel to choose mark

number desired (“ORIGIN MARK(No.)” chosen at step 4) or origin mark

symbol (“ORIGIN MARK(SYM)” chosen at step 4) and then push the left

button. The following origin marks are available.

Origin mark (symbols)

8. Push the left button again. The cursor jumps into the effective display area

and the guidance box now reads “MARK / EXIT.”

9. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the location desired.

10. Push the left button to inscribe the origin mark at the cursor location. The

bearing and range from the origin mark to the cursor location are shown just

below the MARK box.

MARK

-> +

162.5 T 11.7

Bearing and range from

origin mark to cursor

Mark box, showing bearing and range from origin mark

•

To inscribe a different standard origin mark number or symbol origin mark,

repeat steps 7-10. (“ORIGIN MARK(No.)” or (“ORIGIN MARK(SYM)” should

be preselected as appropriate.)

•

To quit entering origin marks, push the right button when the guidance box

reads “MARK / EXIT.”

•

Origin mark data reads “- - -.-” when the cursor is placed outside the effective

display area.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-58

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

1.30.2 Origin mark stabilization

Origin marks may be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or moving (sea

stabilized).

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box.

2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB and then push the wheel.

4. Roll the wheel to choose GND or SEA as appropriate and then push the

wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1.30.3 Deleting individual origin marks

The procedure below shows how to delete individual origin marks. Note that

origin marks cannot be deleted collectively.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“MARK DELETE / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the origin mark you wish to erase.

3. Push the left button or the wheel to erase the mark.

4. To erase another mark, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5. To finish, push the right button when the guidance box reads “MARK

DELETE / EXIT.”

*: Not available

on IMO radar.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-59

1.31 Zoom

The zoom function enlarges an area of interest as large as twice the normal

viewing size, in the text window. To use the zoom display, it must be turned on in

the DATA BOX menu. For further details, see paragraph 1.41.

Zoom is not available when the ARPA target data setting is “LARGE” and the

navigation data is turned on.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“ZOOM / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to choose the location to zoom.

3. Push the left button or the wheel. A circle inscribes the location zoomed and

the zoom display at the right side of the screen shows the zoomed picture.

Zoom area selected

with the cursor

Data Box

Zoom

Area Zoom display

(Appears in box above

when nav data is turned

off.)

Zoom display

To quit the zoom display, push the left button when the guidance box reads

“ZOOM / EXIT.”

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-60

1.32 Markers

1.32.1 Heading marker and heading line

The heading marker and the heading line indicate the ship's heading in all

presentation modes. The heading line is a line from the own ship position to the

outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing

scale in head-up mode; it changes the orientation depending on the ship

orientation in north-up and true motion modes. The heading marker is a small

circle on the bearing scale to indicate the heading when the display is

off-centered or is in north-up or TM mode.

Temporarily erasing the heading line

To temporarily extinguish the heading line to look at targets existing dead ahead

of own ship, press the [HL OFF] key on the keyboard, or roll the trackball to

choose the HL OFF box at the bottom left corner of the display and then push

the left button. In addition to the heading line, the stern marker and all graphics

within the effective display are also erased. To redisplay the heading line, etc.,

release the key or the left button.

1.32.2 Stern marker

The stern marker, which is a dot-and-dash line, appears opposite to the heading

line. To display or erase this marker do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the display and

then push the left button to display the MAIN menu.

2. Roll the wheel to choose MARK and then push the wheel or the left button to

show the MARK menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 STERN MARK and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1.32.3 North marker

The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up mode, the

north marker moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass

signal.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-61

1.32.4 Own ship symbol

The own ship symbol ( ) can be displayed or erased on the MARK menu. This

symbol is scaled to indicate the length and beam of the vessel. If the largest

dimension of the symbol gets smaller than 6 mm, the symbol will disappear and

own ship will be represented with a small dot or circle depending on the range in

use. Ship’s dimensions should be entered at installation.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the display and

then push the left button to display the MAIN menu.

2. Roll the wheel to choose MARK and then push the wheel or the left button to

show the MARK menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 OWN SHIP MARK and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-62

1.33 Automatic Picture Setup According to

Navigation Purpose

Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the

radar, which can be a nuisance in a busy situation. Instead of changing radar

settings case by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide

optimum settings for often encountered situations.

The radar's internal computer offers several picture setup options to be assigned

to each function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one

of the functions is assigned the buoy detecting function and labeled SHIP on the

on the PICTURE box. By choosing SHIP, the radar will be instantly set for

optimum detection of ships.

Four user-programmable setups are also provided (labeled

PICTURE1-PICTURE4), so that you may have the radar automatically adjusted

to those conditions which are not covered by the provided setup options.

Below are the preset picture setup options provided with this radar.

Picture setup options description

Label Description Label Description

NEAR Optimum setting for short range

detection using a range scale of 3

nm or less on calm seas

FAR Optimum setting for long range

detection using a range scale of 6

nm or larger

NEAR

BUOY

Optimum setting for detecting

navigation buoys, small vessels and

other small surface objects at close

range

FAR

BUOY

Optimum setting for detecting

navigation buoys, small vessels

and other small surface objects at

long range

ROUGH

SEA

Optimum setting for rough weather

or heavy rain

SHIP Optimum setting for detecting

vessels

HARBOR Optimum setting for short range

navigation in a harbor area using a

range scale of 1.5 nm or less

COAST For coastal navigation using a

range of 12 nm or less

Each picture setup option defines a combination of several radar settings for

achieving optimum setup for a particular navigating situation. Those involved are

interference rejector, echo stretch, echo average, noise rejector, automatic

anti-sea and anti-rain clutters, video contrast, pulselength and sea and radar

conditions.

Adjusting these features from the PICTURE menu changes the original function

key settings. To restore the original settings for a particular picture setup option,

it is necessary to choose the default setting. For this reason, we recommended

that you use the user-programmable function sets when frequent adjustment of

the radar picture is necessary.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-63

Picture setup options and default settings

1 INT

REJECT

2 ECHO

STRETCH

3 ECHO

AVERAGE

4 NOISE

REJ

5 AUTO

STC

6 AUTO

RAIN

7 VIDEO

CONTRAST

PICTURE 1 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF C

PICTURE 2 2 2 1 OFF OFF OFF D

PICTURE 3 2 OFF 2 OFF ON OFF C

PICTURE 4 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 3

NEAR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF C

FAR 2 2 3 OFF ON OFF D

NEAR BUOY 2 1 1 OFF OFF OFF C

FAR BUOY 2 2 3 OFF ON OFF D

ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 OFF ON OFF 3

SHIP 3 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF C

HARBOR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF C

COAST 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF C

8 PULSE 9 CONDITION

P/L on

0.5 nm

P/L on

0.75 nm

P/L on

1.5 nm

P/L on 3

P/L on 6

P/L on

12-24 nm

Sea Cond. STC Range

PICTURE 1 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 2 ±0

PICTURE 2 S2 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 ±0

PICTURE 3 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 3 ±0

PICTURE 4 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 2 ±0

NEAR S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 L 2 ±0

FAR S2 M1 M1 M3 L L 3 ±0

NEAR BUOY S2 M1 M1 M2 L L 2 ±0

FAR BUOY S2 M1 M1 M3 L L 3 ±0

ROUGH SEA S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 4 ±0

SHIP S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 ±0

HARBOR S1 S1 S2 M1 M3 L 2 ±0

COAST S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 ±0

1.33.1 Choosing a picture setup option

You may choose a picture setup options as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.

NEAR BUOY*

* Other indications:

NEAR, FAR, NEAR BUOY,

FAR BUOY, ROUGH SEA,

SHIP, HARBOR, COAST,

PICTURE 1 - PICTURE 4

PICTURE box

2. Push the left button to choose picture setup option desired.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-64

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT

OFF/1/2/3

2 ECHO STRETCH

OFF/1/2/3

3 ECHO AVERAGE

OFF/1/2/3

4 NOISE REJ

OFF/ON

5 AUTO STC

OFF/ON

6 AUTO RAIN

OFF/1/2/3/4

7 VIDEO CONTRAST

1/2/3/4/

A/B/C

8 [PULSE]

9 [CONDITION]

0 DEFAULT

1.33.2 Restoring default picture setup options

Any of the radar functions programmed with the picture setup options may be

adjusted as desired. If you get lost in operation and want to restore the default

settings for a particular picture setup operation, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.

NEAR BUOY*

* Other indications:

NEAR, FAR, NEAR BUOY,

FAR BUOY, ROUGH SEA,

SHIP, HARBOR, COAST,

PICTURE 1 - PICTURE 4

PICTURE box

2. Push the left button to choose the picture setup option for which you want to

restore its default settings.

3. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

PICTURE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 0 DEFAULT.

5. Push the wheel or the left button three times to restore default settings for the

picture setup selected. (If you are using the keyboard, press the [ENTER

MARK] key three times.)

6. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-65

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT

OFF/1/2/3

2 ECHO STRETCH

OFF/1/2/3

3 ECHO AVERAGE

OFF/1/2/3

4 NOISE REJ

OFF/ON

5 AUTO STC

OFF/ON

6 AUTO RAIN

OFF/1/2/3/4

7 VIDEO CONTRAST

1/2/3/4/

A/B/C

8 [PULSE]

9 [CONDITION]

0 DEFAULT

1.33.3 User-programmable picture setups

Four user-programmable picture setups are provided and they are labeled

PICTURE 1 – PICTURE 4 in the PICTURE box. You may program them as

follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.

2. Push the left button to choose PICTURE 1, PICTURE 2, PICTURE 3 or

PICTURE 4, whichever you wish to set.

3. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.

PULSE menu

4. Set items 1-6 and 8 referring to the following paragraphs:

1 INT REJECT: 1.19

2 ECHO STRETCH: 1.26

3 ECHO AVERAGE: 1.27

4 NOISE REJ: 1.36

5 AUTO STC: 1.17

6 AUTO RAIN: 1.18

8 PULSE: 1.15

5. Roll the wheel to choose 7 VIDEO CONTRAST and then push the wheel or

the left button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 1, 2, 3 or 4 (Dynamic Range) or A, B, C (Curve) as

appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button.

1-4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides the widest dynamic range; 4 is the

narrowest dynamic range.

A: Mid-level in the curve is low, so this setting is suitable for suppressing rain

clutter.

B: Curve between A and C.

C: Mid-level in the curve is high, so this setting is suitable for detecting

distant targets.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-66

[CONDITION MENU]

1 BACK

2 SEA CONDITION

1/2/3/4/5

3 ANT HEIGHT

5/7.5/10/15/20/

25/30/35/40/45/

more50m

4 STC RANGE

+00

7. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CONDITION] and then push the wheel to show

the CONDITION menu.

CONDITION menu

8. Roll the wheel to choose 2 SEA CONDITION and then push the wheel or the

left button.

9. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate sea condition and then push the wheel

or the left button. The larger the number the rougher the sea state.

10. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ANT HEIGHT and then push the wheel or the left

button.

11. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate radar antenna height (above the

waterline) and then push the wheel or the left button.

12. If necessary, roll the wheel to choose 4 STC RANGE, to adjust effective STC

range, and then push the wheel or the left button. The setting range is –10 to

+10. The larger the number the longer the effective STC range becomes. Roll

the wheel to set and then push the wheel or the left button. (Note that the

keyboard cannot be used to enter the setting.)

13. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-67

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK

2 [DATA BOX]

3 [F1]

4 [F2]

5 [F3]

6 [F4]

7 [OPERATION]

8 [TEST]

[F1]

1 BACK

2 [ECHO]

3 [STD KEY]

4 [ARPA•AIS]

5 [OPERATION]

1.34 Programming Function Keys

Less-often used functions are provided in the menu. To avoid opening the

menus to set up the radar for a particular situation, function keys F1-F4 may be

assigned any of the functions shown in the CUSTOMIZE•TEST sub menu.

1.34.1 Activating a function key

To activate the function assigned to a function key, press the key to instantly set

the radar for the preset purpose. Further press the key to choose option.

Function key Default setting

F1 Interference Rejector

F2 Echo Stretch

F3 Auto Rain

F4 Heading Line Off

1.34.2 Programming the functions keys

Do the following to program the function keys.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the display and

then push the left button to display the MAIN menu.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel.

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 [F1], 4 [F2], 5 [F3] or 6 [F4], whichever function

key you want to set, and then push the wheel or the left button. For example,

choose 3 [F1] and then push the left button.

F1 menu

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-68

[ECHO]

1 BACK

PICTURE/

ES/

EAV/

NOISE REJ/

ANT SELECT/

PULSE LENGTH/

A/C SEA SELECT/

AUTO RAIN SELECT/

TUNE SELECT/

ANT HEIGHT/

SEA CONDITION/

2ND ECHO REJ/

PM/

SART/

[ARPA•AIS]

1 BACK

DISP ARPA/

DISP AIS/

TARGET DATA & ACQ/

PAST POSN INTERVAL/

REF MARK/

CPA LIMIT/

CPA/

TCPA/

GZ1/

GZ2/

TARGET LIST SORT/

TRIAL MANEUVER/

ARPA•AIS FUSION/

AIS MESSAGE

[STD KEY]

1 BACK

ALARM ACK/

STBY TX/

HL OFF/

EBL OFFSET/

MODE/

OFF CENTER/

CU TM RESET/

INDEX LINE/

VECTOR TIME/

VECTOR MODE/

TARGET LIST/

TRAIL/

BRILL/

MARK/

MENU/

RANGE UP/

RANGE DOWN/

ACQ/

TARGET DATA/

TARGET CANCEL

[OPERATION]

1 BACK

ECHO COLOR/

BACK COLOR/

RING/

ALARM1/

ALARM2/

WATCH ALARM RESET/

ZOOM/

MARK DELETE/

CHART ALIGN/

DISPLAY SELECT/

MOB/

USER DEFAULT/

TLL

4. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate category, ECHO, STD KEY, ARPA•AIS

or OPERATION and then push the wheel or the left button. Refer to the

menus below to choose appropriate category.

Function key categories and options

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-69

5. Roll the wheel to choose “2” and then push the wheel or the left button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose function desired and then push the wheel or left

button.

7. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

Description of function key programs

Item Description

[ECHO]

PICTURE Chooses picture setup function.

IR Chooses interference rejection level.

ES Chooses echo stretch function.

EAV Chooses echo averaging function.

NOISE REJ Turns noise rejector on/off.

ANT SELECT Chooses antenna.

PULSE LENGTH Chooses pulselength.

A/C SEA SELECT Chooses A/C SEA adjustment method.

AUTO RAIN SELECT Chooses AUTO RAIN level.

TUNE SELECT Chooses tuning adjustment method.

ANT HEIGHT Sets antenna height.

SEA CONDITION Sets sea condition.

ECHO REJ Turns 2

trace echo rejector on/off.

PM Turns performance monitor on/off.

SART Turns SART setup conditions on/off.

[STD KEY]

ALARM ACK Acknowledges alarm. (Silences audible alarm.)

STBY TX Toggles between stand-by and transmit.

HL OFF Turns heading line on/off.

EBL OFFSET Offsets EBL.

OFF CENTER Off centers the display.

CU TM RESET Returns own ship mark to point 75% of range in use.

INDEX LINE Turns index line on/off.

VECTOR TIME Sets vector time.

VECTOR MODE Sets vector mode.

TARGET LIST Displays target list.

TRAIL Sets trail parameters.

BRILL Sets brilliance.

MARK Chooses mark to inscribe.

MENU Opens the MAIN menu.

RANGE UP Raises the range scale.

RANGE DOWN Lowers the range scale.

ACQ Acquires ARPA target; activate sleeping AIS target.

TARGET DATA Shows target data.

TARGET CANCEL Cancels tracking of ARPA target; sleep AIS target.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-70

Description of function key programs (con’t)

Item Description

[ARPA•AIS]

DISP ARPA Activates/deactivates ARPA.

DISP AIS Activates/deactivates AIS.

TARGET DATA & ACQ ARPA: Acquires ARPA target; shows data for ARPA

target selected.

AIS: Activates sleeping AIS target; shows data for AIS

target selected.

PAST POSN INTERVAL Chooses past position plotting interval.

REF MARK Inscribes reference mark (for target-based speed).

CPA LIMIT Turns CPA limit on/off.

CPA Enters CPA range.

TCPA Enters TCPA time.

GZ1 Sets Guard Zone 1.

GZ2 Sets Guard Zone 2.

TARGET LIST SORT Sorts target list.

TRIAL MANEUVER Executes trial maneuver.

ARPA•AIS FUSION Converts ARPA target to AIS target.

AIS MESSAGE Displays AIS message board.

[OPERATION]

ECHO COLOR Chooses echo color.

BACK COLOR Chooses background color.

RING Turns range rings on/off.

ALARM1 Sets no. 1 guard alarm.

ALARM2 Sets no. 2 guard alarm.

WATCH ALARM RESET

Resets watch alarm.

ZOOM Enables zoom.

MARK DELETE Deletes mark (origin mark, waypoint mark, plotter mark).

CHART ALIGN Aligns chart with radar picture.

DISPLAY SELECT Chooses display mode.

MOB Inscribes MOB mark (WP 200).

USER DEFAULT Restores default settings.

TLL Outputs radar target’s L/L position to video plotter.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-71

[OS POSN MENU]

1 NAV AID

GPS1/GPS2/

DEAD RECKONING

2 MANUAL L/L

00°00.00 N

000°00.00 W

1.35 Ship’s Position

Choose the source of ship’s position data as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the OS POSN box at the top right corner of the

screen.

OS POSN

OS POSN box

2. Push the right button to show the OS POSN menu.

OS POSN menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 NAV AID and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose GPS1, GPS2 or DEAD RECKONING as

appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button.

GPS1: GPS Navigator connected to nav port

GPS2: GPS navigator connected to SPEED LOG port or TRACK CONTROL

port.

5. If you have chosen DEAD RECKONING go to step 6 to enter position

manually. For GPS1 or GPS2, go to step 7.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MANUAL L/L and then push the wheel. Enter

latitude and longitude position as follows:

Roll the wheel to set appropriate digit in the latitude field and then push the

wheel. (You may push the wheel again to skip a place.) For keyboard

operation, press appropriate numeric keys and then press the [ENTER

MARK] key.

2) Set longitude similar to how you set latitude and then push the wheel. (For

keyboard operation, press the [ENTER MARK] key.)

Note: Co-ordinate polarity may be switched by rolling the wheel or pressing the

[2] key in case of keyboard operation.

7. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-72

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT

OFF/1/2/3

2 ECHO STRETCH

OFF/1/2/3

3 ECHO AVERAGE

OFF/1/2/3

4 NOISE REJ

OFF/ON

5 AUTO STC

OFF/ON

6 AUTO RAIN

OFF/1/2/3/4

7 VIDEO CONTRAST

1/2/3/4/

A/B/C

8 [PULSE]

9 [CONDITION]

0 DEFAULT

1.36 Noise Rejector

White noise may show itself on the screen as random “speckles” spread over the

entire radar image. You can remove this noise as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.

2. Push the right button to open the PICTURE menu.

PICTURE menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 NOISE REJ and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON or OFF as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-73

[ECHO]

1 BACK

2 2

ECHO REJ

OFF/ON

3 TUNE INITIALIZE

4 PM

OFF/ON

5 SART

OFF/ON

6 WIPER

OFF/1/2

1.37 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes

In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false

echoes (second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo

is received one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been

transmitted.

Second-trace

echo

Tx repetition

Actual range

False echo

range

Second-trace echoes

To reject second-trace echoes:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button

to open the ECHO menu.

ECHO menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 2

ECHO REJ and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-74

1.38 Adjusting Brilliance of Screen Data

You can adjust relative brilliance levels of various markers and alphanumeric

readouts displayed on the screen.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the bottom left corner of the

screen and then push the right button to show the BRILL menu.

[BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]

1 BACK

2 BRG CURSOR

3 EBL

4 VRM

5 INDEX LINE

6 ARPA SYMBOL

7 AIS SYMBOL

8 L/L GRID

9 MARK

0 CHART

Choose 0 NEXT

to show page 2

of the BRILL menu.

[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)]

1 ECHO COLOR

YEL/GRN/

WHT/COLOR*

2 BKGD COLOR

BLK-GRN/

BLK-RED/

BLU-CIR/

BLU/BRT-BLU

3 PANEL DIMMER

4 CHARACTER

5 CURSOR

6 ECHO

7 TRAIL

8 HL

9 RING

0 NEXT

* Not available

on IMO radar.

Note: Four brilliance and color sets are

provided. For further details see

paragraph 1.44.

BRILL menu

2. Roll the wheel to choose item you wish to adjust and then push the wheel or

the left button. (To go to the second page of the BRILL menu choose 0 NEXT

and push the wheel.)

Page 1 Page 2

Item Adjusts

brilliance of;

Item Adjusts

brilliance of;

1 ECHO COLOR See para. 1.49. 2 BRG CURSOR Bearing cursor

2 BKGD COLOR See para. 1.49. 3 EBL EBLs

3 PANEL

DIMMER

Backlighting of

control unit

4 VRM VRMs

4 CHARACTER All alphanumeric

characters

5 INDEX LINE Index lines

5 CURSOR Cursor (+) and

arrow

6 ARPA

SYMBOL

ARPA symbols

6 ECHO Radar echoes 7 AIS SYMBOL AIS symbols

7 TRAIL Target trails 8 L/L Chart grid

8 HL Heading line 9 MARK All marks

9 RING Range rings 0 CHART Chart

3. Roll the wheel to set brilliance level. The range of adjustment for items

except “HL” and “CURSOR” is 0-100%. The range of adjustment for HL and

CURSOR is 50-100%.

4. Push the right button once or twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-75

[ALARM]

1 BACK

2 GUARD ALARM MODE

IN/OUT

3 GUARD ALARM MODE

1/2/3/4

4 WATCH ALARM

OFF/6M/10M/

12M/15M/20M

5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL

LOW/MID/HIGH

6 [ALARM OUT1]

7 [ALARM OUT2]

8 [ALARM OUT3]

1.39 Watch Alarm

The watch alarm sounds the audible alarm at the chosen time interval to help

you keep regular watch of the radar picture for safety or other purposes.

The WATCH box appears at the lower-left corner of the screen with a watch

alarm timer counts down from value set (for example, “12:00”).

WATCH

12:00

WATCH box

When a preset time interval has elapsed, the audible watch alarm is released,

the screen label WATCH turns red and the watch alarm timer freezes at “0:00.”

To silence the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the full keyboard or roll the

trackball to choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button. The label

WATCH turns to normal color and the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial

value and starts the count-down sequence again.

If you press the [ALARM ACK] key or click the box with the left button before the

selected time interval is reached, the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial

value and starts the count-down sequence again.

To set watch time interval:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ALARM then push the wheel or the left button.

ALARM menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 WATCH ALARM and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate time interval and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-76

[NAV DATA]

1 BACK

2 DEPTH

OFF/m/ft

3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE

10/20/50/

100/200/500

4 DEPTH MARK

000m

5 CURRENT

OFF/ON

6 WIND

OFF/m/s/KT

7 TEMP

OFF/ON

8 DATE-TIME

OFF/UTC/LOCAL

9 LOCAL TIME ADJ

+00:00

0 WPT DATA

OFF/REL/TRUE

1.40 Setting Up Nav Data

Wind, depth, ocean current, water temperature, date and time and waypoint data

may be set up as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 7 NAV DATA and then push left button to open the

NAV DATA menu.

NAV DATA menu

3. Choose appropriate options referring to the table on the next page for details.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-77

Nav data menu description

Item Description

2 DEPTH Chooses unit of depth measurement, or turn

depth indication off.

3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE Chooses depth scale range. The echogram

shows the last 30 minutes of sounding along

the ship’s track.

4 DEPTH MARK Chooses the depth at which to show the depth

mark.

5 CURRENT Turns ocean current display on (ocean current

relative to North) or off.

6 WIND Chooses unit of wind speed measurement, or

turn wind indication off.

7 TEMP Turns water temperature indication on/off.

8 DATE-TIME Chooses how to display date and time: OFF,

UTC or LOCAL.

9 LOCAL TIME ADJ If LOCAL is selected at 8 DATE-TIME, roll the

wheel to set the time difference between local

time and UTC time.

0 WPT DATA Turn waypoint data off, or display range and

bearing to waypoint.

4. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

Note: Wind and current data require appropriate sensors. Depth data requires

appropriate echo-sounding equipment. Wind vector shows a direction

from which the wind blows in, relative to own ship heading, and labeled “T

*.” Wind velocity is a true wind speed as a result of compensating for own

ship’s speed and orientation. Ocean current (tide) is the direction to which

the current is flowing away own ship position, relative to north.

30 20 10 min 100 m

Present depth

Last 30 minutes

of depth

OS heading

Wind direction relative to

OS heading, full scale

100 kt. TRUE WIND is a

calculated value from the

relative value and OS

heading.

Echogram Wind, tide graph

Tide relative to north,

full scale 10 kt

Examples of depth echogram and wind, tide graph

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-78

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK

2 [DATA BOX]

3 [F1]

4 [F2]

5 [F3]

6 [F4]

7 [OPERATION]

8 [TEST]

[DATA BOX]

1 BACK

3 NAV DATA

OFF/ON

4 ZOOM

OFF/2TIMES/3TIMES

5 ZOOM DISPLAY

STAB GND/STAB HGD/

STAB NORTH/

ARPA TRACK

6 TARGET DATA

1BOX/2BOX/3BOX/

LARGE

1.41 Text Window Setup

The text window, displayed at the right 1/4 of the screen, mainly shows nav data,

zoomed target, and ARPA target data. You can set up this window as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel or

the left button.

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 [DATA BOX] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

DATA BOX menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 3 NAV DATA and then push the wheel or the left

button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ZOOM and then push the wheel or the left button.

7. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or zoom magnification factor (2TIMES or 3

TIMES) and then push the wheel or the left button.

8. If you chose a zoom factor at step 7, go to step 9. Otherwise, go to step 11.

9. Roll the wheel to choose 5 ZOOM DISPLAY and then push the wheel or the

left button.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-79

10. Roll the wheel to choose zoom display format and then push the wheel or the

left button.

REL: Zoom display moves in relative motion

STAB: Zoom display is ground stabilized (geographically fixed)

ACQ: Zoom ARPA targets

11. Roll the wheel to choose 6 TARGET DATA and then push the wheel or the

left button.

12. Roll the wheel to choose quantity of ARPA target data to show among 1BOX,

2BOX, 3BOX and LARGE and then push the wheel or the left button.

Note: Nav data or zoom is

automatically removed

when "3BOX" is selected.

LARGE

Nav Data or Zoom

ARPA, AIS Functions

Box

Warnings, Alerts

Guidance Box

1 BOX

Zoom

Nav Data or Zoom

ARPA, AIS Functions

Box

Warnings, Alerts

Guidance Box

1 BOX

2 BOX

Nav Data or Zoom

ARPA, AIS Functions

Box

Warnings, Alerts

Guidance Box

1 BOX

2 BOX

3 BOX

ARPA, AIS Functions

Box

Warnings, Alerts

Guidance Box

1 BOX 2 BOX

3 BOX LARGE

ARPA target data setting and data box arrangement

13. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-80

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK

2 [DATA BOX]

3 [F1]

4 [F2]

5 [F3]

6 [F4]

7 [OPERATION]

8 [TEST]

[OPERATION]

1 BACK

2 WHEEL DRIVE

NORMAL/REVERSE

3 KEY BEEP*

OFF/LO/MID/HI

6 OWN SHIP VECTOR

OFF/HDG/COURSE

1.42 Customizing Operation

Several operation items may be customized to suit your needs.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel or

the left button to open the CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu.

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [OPERATION] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

OPERATION menu

4. Set each item as appropriate, referring to the table on the next page for

details.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

* Non-IMO type

radar onl

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-81

Operation menu items

Item No. Description Options

2 WHEEL DRIVE

Choose how to cycle data when

using the wheel.

NORMAL: Cycles numeral

data in numeric order and

indication data in clockwise

order.

REVERSE: Reverse of

NORMAL.

3 KEY BEEP

(Non-IMO type

only)

Key beeps when key sequence

has been correctly executed.

OFF: No key beep

LO, MID, HI: Loudness of

key beep

(Loudness adjustment on

Non-IMO type only)

6 OWN SHIP

VECTOR

Choose what the own ship

vector displays.

OFF: No own ship vector

HDG: Vector shows heading

direction.

COURSE: Vector shows

course.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-82

1.43 Alarms

When error is detected, the appropriate alarm indication appears (in red) and the

audible alarm sounds. Silence the audible alarm with the [ALARM ACK] key or

choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button. The error indication

remains on the display until the reason for the alarm is removed.

1.43.1 Alarm description

Alarm description

Warning Audible

alarm Visual alarm To quit alarm status

GYRO

failure

2 beeps HDG indication reads “***.*” and

the message HEADING SET

appears at the lower-left corner of

the screen. GYRO in red.

Display is automatically switched to

head-up mode within 1 min.

Pres the [MODE] key top

erase the message. Match

the on-screen HDG readout

with the actual compass

reading, if necessary.

Guard

alarm

Beeps Target flashes. Press the [ALARM ACK] key

or click the ALARM ACK box

with the left button.

WATCH

alarm

Beeps WATCH 0:00

(WATCH appears and time count

freezes at 0:00).

Press the [ALARM ACK] key

or click the WATCH box with

the left button. The WATCH

box is displayed in normal

video and the timer is reset.

Own ship

lat/lon

Cursor

lat/lon

None “***.*” In own ship position field

“***.*” In cursor position field

Make sure that own ship

position data is fed from

external radionav equipment.

System

failure

None Message GYRO appears at screen

bottom. No radar echoes. SYSTEM

FAIL in red at the lower left of the

display during test.

Make sure the antenna is

turned on.

Incorrect

keystroke

Double

beep tone

(Non-IMO

type)

None Correct keystroke is

responded by a single beep

provided that KEY BEEP ON

is selected in the

OPERATION menu.

Log failure 2 beeps LOG **.* and LOG appear in red, if

no log signal is input for 30 s while

the ship speed has been more than

5.0 kt.

If the SDME has failed, use

the Manual Speed mode or

other appropriate sensor.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-83

Alarm description (con’t from previous page)

Warning Audible

alarm Visual alarm To quit alarm status

EPFS

failure

Continuous

beep

EPFS in red (EPFS: electronic

position-fixing system) in the

warning and indication cell.

The indication also appears when

the GPS mode is switched

between GPS and DGPS.

To silence the beep and

erase the message, press

the [ALARM ACK] key or

click the ALARM ACK box

with the left button.

Message cannot be

erased if position signal is

missing; it is automatically

erased when signal is

restored.

SOG

indication

none The SOG (Speed Made Good)

indication turns red at the top data

cell when SOG option is selected

on the menu and the associated

SDME (Speed and Distance

Measuring Equipment = Speed log)

fails to detect a bottom tracking

speed, resulting in the “Speed

through the water” (STW) mode

automatically.

COLLISION Continuous

beep

COLLISION comes on when

ARPA-tracked target is on collision

course.

Take evasive action or

terminate tracking of

target.

Then, the visual indication

goes off.

TRUE

VECTOR

indication

None The TRUE VECTOR indication

turns red when the TRUE Vector is

selected in the RM mode, and

returns to the normal text color in

the North-up TM mode.

Guard Zone

alarm

Continuous

beep

The label GZ appears in red if a

target enters to the target alarm

zone. Target is masked by a

flashing inverted triangle.

Press the [ALARM ACK]

key or click the ALARM

ACK box with the left

button to acknowledge it.

GZ OUT

alarm

None If the range scale has been

reduced to make one of GZs

positions more than 1.5 times of

the range scale, the label GZ OUT

appears in red.

Change the range scale of

GZ.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-84

[ALARM]

1 BACK

2 GUARD ALARM MODE

IN/OUT

3 GUARD ALARM LEVEL

1/2/3/4

4 WATCH ALARM

OFF/6M/10M/

12M/15/20M

5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL

LOW/MID/HIGH

6 [ALARM OUT1]

7 [ALARM OUT2]

8 [ALARM OUT3]

[ALARM OUT1]

1 BACK

GUARD ALARM

WATCH ALARM

GUARD ZONE

LOST TARGET

CPA LIMIT

AUTO ACQ TGT FULL

MAN ACQ TGT FULL

ARPA SYSTEM ERROR

AZIMUTH

HEAD LINE

TRIGGER

VIDEO

GYRO

LOG

EPFS

XTE

ARRIVAL WPT

DEPTH

1.43.2 Outputting alarm signal

Four ports are provided from which to output alarm signals to external equipment.

Choose the port and alarm signals to output as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ALARM and then push the wheel or the left

button.

ALARM menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate “ALARM OUT” item (6-8), and then

push the wheel or the left button.

ALARM OUT1 menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose an alarm to output and then push the wheel or the

left button. The alarm chosen is underlined.

5. Repeat step 5 to choose other alarms to output.

6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-85

1.44 Choosing the Antenna, Displaying Antenna

Information

This radar’s interswitch uses an Ethernet to exchange video and control signals

and actual interswitching is done with a digitized signal. Max. 4 antennas may be

selected from the menu.

1.44.1 Choosing the antenna

For the ship which carries multiple antennas you may choose the antenna to use

as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ANTENNA box at the left side of

the screen.

ANT1 X-BAND

ANTENNA box

2. Push the left button to choose the antenna to use.

Note: When two radars are viewing the picture from the same antenna, the

picture is adjusted mutually.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-86

[ANT INFORMATION]

ANT NO 1

BAND : X-BAND

MODEL : 12

POS : FORE

ANT NO 2

BAND : X-BAND

MODEL : 12

POS : FORE

ANT NO 3

BAND :

MODEL :

POS :

ANT NO 4

BAND :

MODEL :

POS :

OWN RADAR NO.

1.44.2 Displaying antenna information

You may display information about the antenna(s) installed. This feature is not

available when the interswitch is in use.

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ANTENNA box at the left side of

the screen.

2. Push the left button to choose the antenna for which you want to find

information. (You cannot choose an antenna which does not exist or one

which is not powered.)

3. Push the right button to show the antenna information display.

ANTENNA INFORMATION display

4. Push the right button to close the antenna information display.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-87

1.45 Cursor Data

Cursor data can be shown in range and bearing from own ship, latitude and

longitude position or cursor’s X-Y coordinates.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the CURSOR DATA box at the right side of the

display.

34 40.849 N

135 18.303 E

CURSOR DATA box (L/L position)

2. Push the left button to choose the cursor data to show. The cursor data

changes in the sequence shown below.

+ 34 0.323 N

135 08.263 E

+ 9.649NM

9.683NM

+ 1351.2 T

13.67NM

Range and bearing from

own ship to cursor position

Latitude and longitude

position of cursor

Cursor X-Y position

Cursor data options

Note 1: For the X-Y coordinates display, the Y-axis is the heading line, right/top

is “plus” and left/lower is “minus.”

Note 2: When displaying latitude and longitude position and the cursor has been

aligned (on the PLOTTER menu), the indication “ALIGN” appears at the

right side of the screen (in red).

Note 3: Cursor data reads “- - -.-” when the cursor is placed outside the effective

display area.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-88

[ECHO]

1 BACK

2 2

ECHO REJ

OFF/ON

3 TUNE INITIALIZE

4 PM

OFF/ON

5 SART

OFF/ON

6 WIPER

OFF/1/2

1.46 Performance Monitor

A performance monitor is required for a radar installed on vessels of 300 GT and

upward engaged in international voyages. Two units are available:

X-band radar: PM-31 (9410 ± 45 MHz)

S-band radar: PM-51 (3050 ± 30 MHz).

The performance monitor is incorporated in the antenna unit.

1.46.1 Activating, deactivating the performance monitor

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button.

ECHO menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 PM and then push the wheel or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

“PM” appears on the display when the performance monitor is active.

1.46.2 Checking radar performance

1. The radar is automatically set up as follows:

Range: 24 nm

Pulselength: Long

Shadow Sector: Off

STC: Off

RAIN: Off

Echo Stretch: Off

Echo Average: Off

Video Contrast: A

Tune: Auto

Gain: Initial setting (as set with PM GAIN ADJ at installation)

2. Turn on the performance monitor referring to paragraph 1.46.1.

3. After observing the results turn off the performance monitor.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-89

The range scale is automatically set to 24 nm. The radar screen will show on or

two arcs. If the radar transmitter and receiver are in good working conditions in

as much as the original state when the monitor was turned up, the innermost are

should appear at 16 nm. The performance monitor can observe a total of 10 dB

loss in transmitter and receiver.

Transmitter: normal

Receiver: normal

Transmitter and receiver:

10 db loss

Echo is not visible

16 nm

Display Radar State

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-90

[ECHO]

1 BACK

2 2

ECHO REJ

OFF/ON

3 TUNE INITIALIZE

4 PM

OFF/ON

5 SART

OFF/ON

6 WIPER

OFF/1/2

1.47 Wiper

The wiper feature lets you simultaneously display targets processed by echo

averaging and those missed by echo averaging, for example, high-speed craft.

This feature is useful for discriminating targets from sea clutter and discerning

high-speed targets. Echo averaging must be turned on to use the wiper feature.

To activate the wiper feature, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button.

ECHO menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 WIPER and then push the wheel or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF, 1 or 2 as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-91

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

1.48 Own Ship Symbol

Own ship symbol ( ) may be inscribed on the screen as below. You may enter

ten such symbols. Each own ship symbols is shown with a number.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the screen. The

guidance box now reads “MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”

MARK

Mark type last

selected, mark

number

-> +

- - -m, - - -m

Dimensions of

own ship

Mark box

2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose “2” and then push the wheel or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OWN SHIP SHAPE and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

6. Push the left button. The cursor jumps to the screen center and the guidance

box now reads “MARK / EXIT.”

7. Push the left button to inscribe the own ship symbol.

•

To enter another own ship marker with a different number, place the cursor in

the MARK box, roll the wheel to choose symbol number, press the left button

twice, then push the left button. (OWN SHIP SHAPE should be preselected on

the MARK menu.)

•

To quit entering own ship symbols, push the right button when the guidance

box reads “MARK / EXIT.”

* Not available

on IMO radar.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-92

1.49 Color and Brilliance Sets

This radar provides four sets of color and brilliance sets to match any ambient

lighting condition. The default colors are as shown in the table below. The default

brilliance setting for any item is “50%”.

BRILL1 BRILL2 BRILL3 BRILL4

Echo Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow

Inside Display,

Outside Display

Black, Black Black, Black Blue, Black Blue, Blue

Menu Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow

Characters Green Red Green White

Bearing Scale Blue Red White Green

1.49.1 Choosing color and brilliance set

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the left side of the screen.

2. Roll the wheel to choose color and brilliance set from among BRILL1 –

BRILL4.

3. Push the wheel to finish.

1.49.2 Presetting color and brilliance set

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the left side of the screen.

2. Push the right button to open the BRILL menu.

[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)]

1 ECHO COLOR

YEL/GRN/

WHT/COLOR*

2 BKGD COLOR

BLK-GRN/

BLK-RED/

BLU-CIR/

BLU/BRT-BLU

3 PANEL DIMMER

4 CHARACTER

5 CURSOR

6 ECHO

7 TRAIL

8 HL

9 RING

0 NEXT * Not available

on IMO radar.

BRILL menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO COLOR and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose echo color desired and then push the wheel or the

left button. “COLOR,” available on the Non-IMO radar, displays echoes in

colors of red, yellow and green, corresponding to signal levels of strong,

medium and weak.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-93

5. Roll the wheel to choose 2 BKGD COLOR and then push the wheel or the

left button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose background color and surrounding color

combination desired and then push the wheel or the left button.

7. Set brilliance-related items referring to paragraph 1.38.

8. Push the right button to close the BRILL menu.

1. RADAR OPERATION

1-94

(This page intentionally left blank.)

2-1

2 RADAR OBSERVATION

2.1 General

2.1.1 Minimum and maximum ranges

Minimum range

The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of

1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m

is still shown separate

from the point representing the antenna position.

It is mainly dependent on the pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing

such as main bang suppression and digital quantization. It is a good practice to

use a shorter range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of

picture. The IMO Resolution MSC.64(67) Annex 4 (Shipborne radar) and A.820:

1995 (High Speed Craft Radar) require the minimum range to be less than 50 m

and 35 m, respectively. This series of radars satisfy this requirement.

Maximum range

The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably

depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the

waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of

the target, and the atmospheric conditions.

Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar

horizon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by

about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax is

given in the following equation.

max

= 2.2 x ( h1 +h2 )

where Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)

h1: antenna height (m)

h2 : target height (m)

Radar horizon

Optical horizon

For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the

height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;

max

= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm

It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which

absorbs the radar signal).

2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2-2

X-band and S-band

In fair weather, the equation on the previous page does not give a significant

difference between X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation

condition, an S-band radar would have better detection than an X-band radar.

Radar resolution

There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing

resolution and range resolution.

Bearing resolution

Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the

echoes received from two targets which are at the same range and close

together. It is proportional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to

the wavelength. The length of the antenna radiator should be chosen for a

bearing resolution better than 2.5° (IMO Resolution). This condition is normally

satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m (4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band radar

requires a radiator of about 12 feet (3.6 m) or longer.

Range resolution

Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received

from two targets which are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is

determined by pulselength only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the

discrimination better than 35 m as do so with all FURUNO radars.

Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors

having an echoing area of 10 m

Bearing accuracy

One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of

a target can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically

depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually

taken relative to the ship’s heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading

line at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To

minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, put the target echo at the

extreme position on the screen by selecting a suitable range.

Range measurement

Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the

radar. Generally, there are two means of measuring range: the fixed range rings

and the variable range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the

screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range

to a target. The variable range marker’s diameter is increased or decreased so

that the marker touches the inner edge of the target, allowing the operator to

obtain more accurate range measurements.

2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2-3

2.2 False Echoes

Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no

target or disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if

you understand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are

shown below.

Multiple echoes

Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a

large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be

observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of

the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often

removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C SEA

control.

Own ship

Target

True

echo

Multiple

echo

Multiple echoes

Sidelobe echoes

Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side

of the beam, called “sidelobes.” If a target exists where it can be detected by the

side lobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on

both sides of the true echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually only on

short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced through careful

reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.

Target B

(True)

Target B

(Spurious)

Target A

Sidelobe echoes

2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2-4

Virtual image

A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions

on the screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and

the other is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on

or close to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a

large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on

the screen.

True

echo

False

echo

Own ship

Target ship

Mirror image

of target ship

Virtual image

Shadow sectors (see above right)

Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar

beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a

non-detecting sector may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be

detected.

Radar

antenna

Radar

mast

Shadow sector

Shadow sectors

2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2-5

2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)

2.3.1 SART description

A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3

cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received

causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete

radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through

the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band

back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve

complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match

that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver.

If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow

sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots

equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.

When the radar to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display my

show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional

dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nautical miles, will be

interspersed with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker

and smaller than the original dots.

9500 MHz

9200 MHz

Radar antenna

beamwidth

Screen A: When SART

is distant Screen B: When SART

is close

Lines of 12 dots

are displayed in

concentric arcs.

Echo from SART

Position of

SART

Own ship

position Own ship

position

SART mark

length

Radar receiver

bandwidth

Sweep time

7.5 µs 95 µs

Sweep start High speed sweep signal

Low speed sweep signal

24 NM 1.5 NM

Position of

SART

Echo from

SART

2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2-6

[ECHO]

1 BACK

2 2

ECHO REJ

OFF/ON

3 TUNE INITIALIZE

4 PM

OFF/ON

5 SART

OFF/ON

6 WIPER

OFF/1/2

2.3.2 Showing SART marks on the radar display

This radar is equipped with a feature which optimally sets up the radar for SART

detection. This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best

tuning condition. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the SART

marks are not erased because the SART response signal scans over all

frequencies in the 9 GHz band. When the radar approaches the SART in

operation, the SART marks will enlarge to large arcs, blurring a large part of the

screen.

To set up for SART detection do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the wheel or the

left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ECHO and then push the wheel or the left button.

Echo menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 SART and then push the wheel or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.

With SART turned on radar functions are set as follows:

Range: 12 nm

Pulselength: Long

Echo Stretch: Off

Noise Rejector: Off

Echo Averaging: Off

Interference Rejector: Off

Performance Monitor: Off

A/C RAIN: Off

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

“SART” appears at the bottom of the display when this feature is active. Be sure

to turn off the SART feature when SART detection is no longer your objective.

2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2-7

2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SART

SART range errors

When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the

SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is

displayed may be as mush as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART.

When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first

of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position.

Radar bandwidth

This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with

the range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz

are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25

MHz with short pulses on short ranges.

A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so

it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the

SART.

Radar side lobes

As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the

SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed

by the use of the anti-clutter sea control although it may be operationally useful

to observe the side lobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions

and also they will confirm that the SART is near to own ship.

Note: SART information excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 OPERATION OF

MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTION.

2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2-8

2.4 RACON

A RACON is a radar beacon which emits radar receivable signals in the radar

frequency spectrum (X- or S-band). There are several signal formats; in general,

the RACON signal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo

originating at a point just beyond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse

coded pattern. Note that the position on the radar display is not accurate.

RACON

3-1

3 ARPA OPERATION

3.1 Usage Precautions

•

The plotting accuracy and response of this ARPA meets IMO standards.

Tracking accuracy is affected by the following:

•

Tracking accuracy is affected by course change. One to two minutes is

needed to restore vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change.

(The actual amount depends on gyrocompass specifications.)

•

The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed

of the target. Delay is on the order of 15-30 seconds for high relative speed;

30-60 seconds for low relative speed.

•

The data generated by this ARPA are intended for reference only. Refer to

official nautical charts for detailed and up-to-date information.

•

A target measuring 800 m or more in the radial or circumferential direction is

regarded as a landmass and not acquired or tracked. Echoes smaller than 800

m are regarded as targets to be tracked.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-2

3.2 Controls for ARPA

Keyboard

The ARPA uses the keys shown below.

ACQ

OFF

VRM

A/C SEAA/C RAIN

MODE

LINE

INDEX

OFF

CENTER

OFF

RESET

CU/TM

OFFSET

EBL

GAIN

TARGET

CANCEL

TARGET

DATA

RANGE

LIST

TARGET

MARK

ENTER

TIME

VECTOR

CANCEL

TRAILS

MODE

VECTOR

BRILL

EBL

OFF

ACK

ALARM

F3 F4

STBY

ACQ: Manually acquires a target.

TARGET DATA: Displays data on ARPA target

chosen with the trackball.

TARGET CANCEL: Terminates tracking of ARPA

target chosen with the trackball.



Control unit RCU-014

Trackball

With the cursor inside the effective display area, you can access ARPA functions

by rolling the wheel or choosing appropriate ARPA function from the CURSOR

menu.

Roll the wheel to show the following indications in the guidance box to access

respective ARPA function:

TARGET DATA & ACQ: Manually acquires a target, or displays data of the

cursor-selected ARPA target.

TARGET CANCEL: Cancels tracking on cursor-selected ARPA target.

ACQ: Manually acquires a target.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-3

3.3 Activating, Deactivating ARPA

To activate or deactivate the ARPA:

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ARPA ACQ MODE box at the right

side of the display.

ARPA

AUTO

ARPA ACQ MODE box

2. Push the left button to show OFF, MAN or AUTO MAN as appropriate.

3.4 Entering Own Ship's Speed

The ARPA requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW,

BT, SOG or echo-referenced speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects).

Manual input is also possible.

For automatic or manual input, see paragraph 1.13. For echo-referenced speed

input follow the procedure below.

3.4.1 Echo-referenced speed input

The use of echo-referenced speed is recommended when:

•

The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar.

•

The vessel has no device which can measure ship's leeward movement

(Doppler sonar, speed log, etc.) when leeward movement can not be

disregarded.

If you select echo-referenced speed, the ARPA calculates own ship's speed

relative to a fixed reference target. The number of targets may be 1, 2 or 3. They

appear as tracked targets, each shown in a small circle. When a plural of objects

are selected, the mean value is used for stabilization and speed.

Note that this feature is not available when the AIS is active.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“REF MARK / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Select a small fixed island or any radar prominent point located at 0.2 to 24

nm from own ship.

3. Roll the trackball to place the cursor (+) on the target selected at step 2.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-4

4. Push the left button to enter the reference mark. (The mark may also be

entered by pressing the [ENTER MARK] key on the full keyboard.)

The reference target mark (see below) appears at the cursor position and the

own ship position data label changes from “LOG,” “NAV” or “MANUAL” to

“REF.” Note that it takes 60 scans or approximately 1 min before a new

speed is displayed. If tracking has failed for a reference target, the target is

marked with a lost target mark (symbol formed with two triangles).

changes to in 60 seconds.

R1 R1

Reference target

5. Repeat steps 2-4 to continue entering reference marks. Three may be

entered.

Notes on speed input by reference target

•

When the reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, the

reference target mark blinks and the speed reads “**.*.” Select a different

reference target in this case.

•

When all targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and the

target-based speed becomes invalid. The speed is indicated as KTBT where

BT means Bottom Track (speed over ground).

•

Reference targets may be marked with a vector. This can be done with 3 REF

TARGET VECTOR on the ARPA TARGET menu.

Canceling echo-referenced speed input

Open the SPD menu, referring to paragraph 1.13, and set 1 SHIP SPEED to

LOG, NAV or MANUAL as appropriate.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-5

[ARPA TARGET MENU]

1 ARPA SELECT

MANUAL100/

AUTO 25/

AUTO 50/

AUTO 75/

AUTO 100

2 ALL CANCEL

3 REF TARGET VECTOR

OFF/ON

3.5 Automatic Acquisition

The FAR-2xx7 radars can acquire a maximum of 100 targets, the number of

automatically and manually acquired targets determined by the ARPA TGT menu

setting.

ARPA TGT menu setting and target acquisition condition

Menu Setting Acquisition condition

MANUAL100 100 targets manually

AUTO25 25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually

AUTO50 50 targets automatically, 50 targets manually

AUTO75 75 targets automatically, 25 targets manually

AUTO100 100 targets automatically

A target just acquired automatically is marked with a broken square and a vector

appears within 20 scans (3 s for HSC) of the antenna to indicate the target's

motion trend. Within 60 scans (20 scans for HSC), the initial tracking stage is

finished and the target becomes ready for stable tracking. At this point, the

broken square mark changes to a solid circle. (Targets automatically acquired

are distinguished from those acquired manually. The targets which are acquired

manually are displayed by bold symbol.)

3.5.1 Enabling auto acquisition

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ARPA ACQ MODE box at the right

side of the screen and then push the right button to show the ARPA TARGET

menu.

ARPA TARGET menu

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ARPA SELECT and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose automatic acquisition condition desired, referring to

the table above for details, and then push the wheel or the left button.

4. Push the right button to close the menu.

Note 1: The ARPA ACQ MODE box shows AUTO or AUTO MAN depending on

the automatic acquisition condition selected.

Note 2: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets is reached,

the message “TARGET-FULL(AUTO)” is displayed at the right-hand side

of screen.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-6

[ARPA TARGET MENU]

1 ARPA SELECT

MANUAL100/

AUTO 25/

AUTO 50/

AUTO 75/

AUTO 100

2 ALL CANCEL

3 REF TARGET VECTOR

OFF/ON

3.5.2 Terminating tracking of targets (including reference targets)

When the ARPA has acquired the menu-set number of targets automatically, the

message “TARGET-FULL(AUTO)” appears at the right side of the screen and no

more auto acquisition occurs unless targets are lost. Should this happen, cancel

tracking of less important targets or perform manual acquisition.

Canceling individual targets

By keyboard:

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor (+) on the ARPA or reference target to

cancel tracking.

2. Press the [TARGET CANCEL] key.

By trackball:

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show

TARGET CANCEL / EXIT in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the ARPA target or reference target

to cancel tracking.

3. Push the left button or the wheel to cancel tracking on the target selected.

4. To finish, push the right button.

Canceling tracking on all targets

1. Roll the trackball to choose the ARPA ACQ MODE box at the right side of the

screen and then push the right button.

ARPA TARGET menu

2. Use the wheel to choose 2 ALL CANCEL.

3. Push the wheel or the left button to cancel tracking on all ARPA targets.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-7

[ARPA TARGET MENU]

1 ARPA SELECT

MANUAL100/

AUTO 25/

AUTO 50/

AUTO 75/

AUTO 100

2 ALL CANCEL

3 REF TARGET VECTOR

3.6 Manual Acquisition

Maximum 100 targets may be acquired manually depending on the acquisition

condition set on the ARPA TGT menu.

3.6.1 Setting manual acquisition conditions

1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ARPA ACQ MODE box at the right

side of the screen and then push the right button to show the ARPA TARGET

menu.

ARPA TARGET menu

2. Roll the wheel to choose 1 ARPA SELECT and then push the wheel.

3. Roll the wheel to choose MANUAL 100, AUTO 25, AUTO 50 or AUTO 75 as

appropriate and then push the wheel or the left button. For details see the

table on page 3-5.

4. Push the right button to close the menu.

3.6.2 Manually acquiring a target

By keyboard

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the target you want to acquire.

2. Press the [ACQ] key.

By trackball

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show

“TARGET DATA & ACQ” or “ACQ” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the target you want to acquire.

3. Push the left button to acquire the target.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-8

The plotting symbol is drawn by broken lines during the initial acquisition stage.

A vector appears in about one minute after acquisition indicating the target's

motion trend. If the target is consistently detected for three minutes, the plotting

symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target plotting symbol

blinks and disappears shortly.

ARPA

Symbol Meaning

Immediately after acquisition, this plotting symbol is shown in

broken lines.

Within 20 scans (3 s for HSC with antenna running at 42 rpm)) of

the antenna after acquisition, a vector appears to show a trend of

movement.

Within 60 scans (20 scans for HSC with antenna speed of 42 rpm)

of the antenna after acquisition, the plotting symbol changes to a

small circle, indicating steady-state tracking condition.

Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target to be acquired should be within 0.2

to 32 nm from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter.

Note 2: When the capacity for manual acquisition is reached, the message

“TARGET-FULL(MAN)” is displayed at the screen bottom. Cancel

tracking of non-threatening targets if you wish to acquire additional

targets manually.

CAUTION

Target Swap

When a target being tracked nears another

target being tracked, the targets may be

"swapped". When two targets acquired

either automatically or manually come close

to each other, one of the two may become

a Lost Target. Should this happen, manual

re-acquisition of the Lost Target may be

required after the two have separated.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-9

3.7 ARPA Symbols and ARPA Symbol Attributes

3.7.1 ARPA symbols

The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 60872-1.

Item Symbol Status Remarks

Initial stage

Broken square around an echo to indicate

the target under acquisition and initial

stage of tracking, before steady-state

tracking.

Between 20 and 60 scans of the antenna

after acquisition (vector still unreliable)

Steady tracking

Solid circle with vector indicating steady

state tracking (60 scans after acquisition)

(flashing)

CPA alarm Plotting symbol changes to an equilateral

triangle, flashing to indicate the target is

predicted to come into CPA or TCPA.

CPA alarm

acknowledge

Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm is

acknowledged.

Automatically

acquired targets

(flashing)

Lost target Lost target is indicated by flashing

diamond symbol. The diamond is formed

from two equal triangles.

Initial stage

Plotting symbol selected for a target

acquired manually is shown in bold broken

lines.

Bold broken square for 20 - 60 scans (3

scans for HSC) of the antenna after

acquisition

Steady tracking Manual plotting symbol in a bold solid

circle (60 scans after acquisition)

(flashing)

CPA alarm

(collision course)

Plotting symbol changes to an equilateral

triangle flashing if a target is predicted to

come into the preset CPA or TCPA.

Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm is

acknowledged.

Manually

acquired targets

(flashing)

Lost target Lost target is indicated by flashing

diamond symbol. The diamond is formed

from two equal triangles.

Guard zone

(flashing)

On target passing

through operator-set

guard zone

Plotting symbol changes to an equilateral

triangle, apex down, flashing together with

vector if target enters guard zone.

Target selected

for data readout

On selected target Target data (range, bearing, course,

speed, CPA and TCPA)

Reference target

In 60 scans,

changes to

○

On reference target Used to calculate own ship’s

over-the-ground speed (echo-referenced

speed) for ground stabilization.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-10

Other ARPA symbols

Item Symbol Status Remarks

Trial maneuver

(flashing)

Bottom center

Appears during execution of a trial

maneuver.

Performance

test

(flashing)

Bottom center Appears during performance test.

3.7.2 ARPA symbol brilliance

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the left side of the screen and

then push the right button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

[BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]

1 BACK

2 BRG CURSOR

3 EBL

4 VRM

5 INDEX LINE

6 ARPA SYMBOL

7 AIS SYMBOL

8 L/L GRID

9 MARK

0 CHART

BRILL menu, page 2

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 ARPA SYMBOL and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to adjust brilliance.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-11

[ARPA•AIS]

1 BACK

2 GUARD ZONE STAB

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

3 GUARD POLYGON

OFF/STAB GND/

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]

5 [ARPA SYMBOL]

6 [AIS SYMBOL]

7 [FUSION]

8 AIS FUNCTION

OFF/ON

[ARPA SYMBOL]

1 BACK

2 ARPA SYMBOL COLOR

RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

3 ARPA SYMBOL SIZE

SMALL/STD/LARGE

4 PAST POSN COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

5 PAST POSN POINTS

5/10

3.7.3 ARPA symbol color and size

You may choose the color and size of the ARPA symbol as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the wheel or the left

button.

ARPA•AIS menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 [ARPA SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

ARPA SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 ARPA SYMBOL COLOR and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel or the left

button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 ARPA SYMBOL SIZE and then push the wheel or

the left button.

7. Roll the wheel to choose SMALL, STD(Standard) or LARGE as appropriate

and then push the wheel or the left button.

8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

*: Not available

on IMO radar.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-12

3.8 Displaying Target Data

The ARPA mode provides the full functionality of ARPA as required by the IMO

Resolution A.823(19) and IEC 60972-1, including display of range, bearing,

course, speed, CPA and TCPA of all plotted targets.

In head-up and head-up true bearing modes, target bearing, course and speed

shown in the upper-right target data field become true (suffix “T”) or relative

(suffix “R”) to own ship in accordance with the true/relative vector setting. In

north-up, course-up and true motion modes, the target data field always displays

true bearing, true course and speed over the ground.

3.8.1 Displaying individual target data

By keyboard

Roll the trackball to place the cursor on a desired ARPA target and press the

[TARGET DATA] key. The target’s shape changes to a square. To erase a

target’s data from the data box, press the key again.

By trackball

1. With cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show “TARGET

DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on a desired ARPA target and then push

the left button.

3. To erase a target’s data from the data box, choose the target on the radar

display and then push the left button.

Target data display is as below.

RNG/BRG: Range and bearing from own ship to the selected target with suffix

“T” (True) or “R” (Relative).

CSE/SPD: Course and speed are displayed for the selected target with suffix “T”

(True) or “R” (relative).

CPA/TCPA: CPA(Closest Point of Approach) is the closest range a target will

approach to own ship. TCPA is the time to CPA. Both CPA and TCPA are

automatically calculated. When the CPA has passed clear of own ship, it is

indicated by a TCPA with a negative (-) sign. TCPA is counted to 99.9 min and

beyond this, it is indicate as TCPA> -99.9MIN.

BCR/BCT: BCR is the closest range at which the chosen target is predicted to

cross your ship’s bow. BCR is the time at which the chosen target is predicted to

cross your ship’s bow.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-13

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

Target selected for data readout

Target in guard zone

Target on colllision course

ARPA TARGET

No. 01

BRG 25.5 T

RNG 3.4NM

T CSE 205.1 T

T SPD 12.3KT

CPA 2.9NM

TCPA 12.2MIN

BCR 1.7NM

BCT 20MIN

BRG: Bearing from own ship to target

in R (Relative) or T (True)

RNG: Range from own ship to target

CSE: Course of target, True or Relative

SPD: Speed of target

CPA: Closest Point of Approach of target

to own ship

TCPA: Time to CPA

BCR: Bow crossing range of target

BCT: Bow crossing time of target

ARPA target display

You may display the target data for two targets per data box and the data for as

many as six targets may be displayed. For further details, see paragraph 1.41.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-14

[TARGET LIST (1/1)]

SORT BY CPA

1 BACK

2 ARPA TARGET

No. 001

BRG 16.5°T RNG 2.05 NM

CPA 0.17NM TCPA>99.59M

3 ARPA TARGET

No. 002

BRG 19.0°T RNG 2.49 NM

CPA 0.29NM TCPA>99.59M

9 REFRESH DATA

3.8.2 Target list

The target list provides a comprehensive data display of all ARPA (and AIS)

targets being tracked.

Displaying the target list

To display the target list, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the TARGET LIST box at the right side of the

screen.

TARGET

LIST

TARGET LIST box

2. Push the left button to display the TARGET LIST. “>” in the TCPA means that

the time is greater than 99:59.

Target list

3. To scroll the list when there are more than three targets, select 0 NEXT and

then push the wheel or the left button.

Note: To refresh data, choose 9 REFRESH DATA and then push the wheel.

This is not necessary when the sorting method is changed (see next

page); data is automatically updated whenever the sorting method is

changed.

4. Push the right button to close the list.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-15

[TARGET LIST MENU]

1 SORT BY

CPA/TCPA/BCR/BCT/

RANGE/SPEED

Sorting the target list

You may sort the target list by CPA, TCPA, BCR, BCT, RANGE or SPEED as

follows: 72 nm or 96 nm range scale

1. Roll the trackball to choose the TARGET LIST box at the right side of the

screen.

2. Push the right button to open the TARGET LIST menu.

TARGET LIST menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 SORT BY and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose sorting method desired and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-16

3.9 Vector Modes

Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or north

(True).

3.9.1 Description of vectors

Ground stabilization and sea stabilization

Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. Sea stabilization is a

mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea using a compass

heading and single axis log water speed inputs in the True Motion mode. Ground

stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the

ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems

unsatisfactory, enter the set and drift correction. Note that set and drift should

not be used when the radar is displaying AIS targets.

True vector

In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and

ships at anchor remain stationary on the radar screen with vector length zero.

But in the presence of wind and/or current, vectors appear on fixed targets

representing the reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift

values are properly entered.

Target on

collision

course

Own ship

Buoy

Own ship

Target on

collision

course

Buoy

True vectors in

head-up mode

Relative vectors in

head-up mode

True and relative vectors

Relative vector

Relative vectors on targets which are not moving over the ground such as land,

navigational marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own

ship’s ground track. A target of which vector extension passes through own ship

is on the collision course. (Dotted lines in the figure are for explanation only.)

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-17

3.9.2 Vector motion and length

Vectors may be displayed in true or relative motion. Vector time (or the length of

vectors) can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 15 or 30 minutes.

By keyboard

1. Press the [VECTOR MODE] key consecutively to choose relative or true

vector mode. Your selection is shown on the Vector motion box. (Note that

this also selects the vector mode for the past position display.)

2. Press the [VECTOR TIME] key consecutively to choose vector time. Your

selection appears in the vector length box (see illustration below).

By trackball

1. Roll the trackball to choose VECTOR TRUE or VECTOR REL (whichever is

displayed) at the right side of the screen.

VECTOR TRUE 15MIN

Vector motion

Vector

time

ARPA VECTOR boxes

2. Push the left button to display VECTOR TRUE or VECTOR REL as

appropriate. (Note that this also selects the vector mode for the past position

display.)

3. Roll the trackball to choose the vector time box.

4. Push the left button to display time desired.

The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector

time elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk

of collision with any target.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-18

3.10 Past Position Display

The ARPA displays equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions of any

targets being tracked.

A new dot is added every minute (or at other preset time intervals) until the

preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be

uneven. If it changes the course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running

straight

speed

(d) Ship increased

speed

Past position display

3.10.1 Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past

position plot interval

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PAST POSN box at the right side of the

screen.

PAST POSN REL 2MIN

PAST POSN box

2. Push the left button to choose plot interval desired: OFF, 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3

or 6 minutes. Choose OFF to erase all past position points and deactivate

the past position display.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-19

[ARPA•AIS]

1 BACK

2 GUARD ZONE STAB

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

3 GUARD POLYGON

OFF/STAB GND/

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]

5 [ARPA SYMBOL]

6 [AIS SYMBOL]

7 [FUSION]

8 AIS FUNCTION

OFF/ON

[ARPA SYMBOL]

1 BACK

2 ARPA SYMBOL COLOR

RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

3 ARPA SYMBOL SIZE

SMALL/STD/LARGE

4 PAST POSN COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

5 PAST POSN POINTS

5/10

3.10.2 Past position display attributes

You may choose the number of past point points to display per plotting interval

and the color of past position points.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the wheel or the left

button.

ARPA•AIS menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 [ARPA SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

ARPA SYMBOL menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 PAST POSN COLOR and then push the wheel or

the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel or the left

button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PAST POSN POINTS and then push the wheel or

the left button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 5 or 10 as appropriate and then push the wheel or

the left button.

7. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

*: Not available

on IMO radar.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-20

[SPEED MENU]

1 SHIP SPEED

LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/

GPS/MANUAL/REF

2 MANUAL SPEED

0.0kt

3 SET DRIFT

OFF/ON

3.11 Set and Drift

Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in

0.1-degree steps. Drift, in another word Rate, the speed of tide, can also be

entered manually in 0.1 knot steps.

Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and

target data. Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information.

These values are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors, set and

drift values should be adjusted until they lose vectors.

To enter set and drift do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the SPD box and then push the right button.

SPEED menu

2. Roll the wheel to choose 3 SET DRIFT and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.

4. Push the right button to close the menu. Then, the SET and DRIFT boxes

appear at upper right-hand side of the display.

5. Roll the trackball to choose the SET box at the right side of the screen.

SET 66.8 T

SET box

6. Use the wheel to set value, rolling it to choose numeral and pushing it to set.

(Setting range: 000.0 – 359.9 (°T))

7. Roll the trackball to choose the DRIFT box at the right side of the screen.

DRIFT 7.2kt

DRIFT box

8. Use the wheel to set value, rolling it to choose numeral and pushing it to set.

(Setting range: 00.0 – 19.9(kt))

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-21

3.12 Setting CPA/TCPA Alarm Ranges

The ARPA continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of

Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each tracked target to own

ship. When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA

alarm range and its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, the

ARPA releases an audible alarm and displays the warning label COLLISION on

the screen. In addition, the ARPA symbol changes to a triangle and flashes

together with its vector.

Provided that this feature is used

correctly, it will help prevent the risk

of collision by alerting you to

threatening targets. It is important

that GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and

other radar controls are properly

adjusted.

CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be

set up properly taking into consideration the size, tonnage, speed, turning

performance and other characteristics of own ship.

3.12.1 Setting CPA/TCPA alarm ranges

To set the CPA/TCPA alarm ranges, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the CPA LIMIT box. If only “CPA LIMIT OFF”

appears press the left button to show the CPA and TCPA boxes.

CPA LIMIT 0.5NM 10MIN

TCPA LIMIT Box

CPA LIMIT Box

CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT boxes

2. Push the left button or roll the wheel to choose the CPA LIMIT box and then

push the wheel.

Left button: 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6(nm)

Wheel: 0.5 - 20(nm), 0-10 nm in 1 nm increments, 0.5 nm increments

thereafter

3. Roll the trackball to choose the TCPA limit box.

4. Push the left button or roll the wheel to choose TCPA value desired and then

push the wheel.

Left button: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 15(minutes)

Wheel: 1-60 minutes, 1 minute increments

CAUTION

CPA/TCPA Alarm

The CPA and TCPA alarm feature should

never be relied upon as the sole means for

detecting the risk of collision.The navigator

is not relieved of the responsibility to keep

visual lookout for avoiding collisions,

whether or not the radar or other plotting

aid is in use.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-22

3.12.2 Acknowledging CPA/TCPA alarm

To acknowledge and silence the CPA/TCPA alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key

on the keyboard, or choose the ALARM ACK box with the trackball and then

push the left button.

The warning label COLLISION and the flashing of the triangle plotting symbol

and vector remain on the screen until the dangerous situation is gone or you

intentionally terminate tracking of the target.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-23

3.13 Setting a Guard Zone

When a target transits the operator-set guard zone, the buzzer sounds and the

indication GUARD appears (in red) at the screen bottom. The target causing the

warning is clearly indicated with an inverted flashing triangle. The guard zone

also functions as an automatic acquisition area when automatic acquisition is

active. Any targets entering the zone will be automatically acquired.

3.13.1 Activating the guard zone

One or two guard zones may be selected. The No. 1 guard zone is available

between 3 and 6 nm and No. 2 guard zone can be set anywhere when the No. 1

zone is already in use. The ARPA/AIS guard zone’s lines are blue and dashed

so as to distinguish them from the radar guard alarm.

The procedure below shows how to set a guard zone, using the example at the

bottom of the page.

1. Roll the trackball to choose one of the GZ (GUARD ZONE) boxes at the right

side of the screen.

GZ 1

GZ 2

Guard zone status

Blank: GZ off

SET: Set guard zone

WORK: Guard zone active

SLEEP: Guard zone "asleep"

GZ boxes

2. Push the left button. The GZ box now reads “GZx SET.”

3. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on point A and then push the left button.

4. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on point B and then push the left button.

The GZ box now reads “GZx WORK.”

0.5-1 nm

Target in guard zone is

marked by inverted

flashing triangle.

Guard zone

If you are setting a polygon guard zone with GZ2, set at least three points. Press

the right button to finish. Note that the status indication should be WORK or

SLEEP to set GZ2.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-24

When an ARPA or AIS target violates the guard zone, the message “GUARD”

appears (in red) at the right side of the display and the offending target is

marked with an inverted triangle.

Note 1: If you wish to create a guard zone having a 360-degree coverage

around own ship, set point B in almost the same direction (approx. ±3°)

as point A and then push the left button.

Note 2: If the range scale is changed to less than half of the guard zone, the GZ

box reads “GZx OUT.” If the left button is pushed in this state, the guard

alarm zone goes into “sleep” state and the guidance box reads “GZ

WORK L = DELETE.”

Note 3: The default guard zone is fan shaped. It may also be a polygon having

3-10 points. For details, see paragraph 3.13.5.

Note 4: Two more alarm zones (No. 1 and No. 2 Guard Alarm Zones) may be

added in addition. This means a maximum 4 alarm zones are available

at a time. ARPA symbols are not changed to inverted triangles in the

guard alarm zone, only those in guard zone do so.

3.13.2 Sleeping, deactivating a guard zone

1. Roll the trackball to choose the appropriate GZ box.

2. Sleep or deactivate the guard zone as appropriate:

Sleep guard zone: Push the left button momentarily to remove the guard

zone from the screen. The indication in the GZ box changes from “GZx

WORK” to “GZx SLEEP.” To reactivate and display the guard zone, repeat

this procedure to display “GZx WORK.”

Deactivate guard zone: Push and hold down the left button until the GZ box

goes blank.

3.13.3 Acknowledging the guard zone alarm

To acknowledge and silence the guard zone audible alarm, press the [ALARM

ACK] key, or choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-25

[ARPA•AIS]

1 BACK

2 GUARD ZONE STAB

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

3 GUARD POLYGON

OFF/STAB GND/

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]

5 [ARPA SYMBOL]

6 [AIS SYMBOL]

7 [FUSION]

8 AIS FUNCTION

OFF/ON

3.13.4 Guard zone reference

The guard zone may be referenced to heading or North as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the wheel or the left

button.

ARPA•AIS menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 GUARD ZONE STAB and then push the wheel or

the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as appropriate and

then the push the wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close menu.

3.13.5 Guard zone shape and stabilization

The shape of the No. 2 guard zone may be a sector or a polygon having up to

10 points. (The shape of the No.1 guard zone is always a sector.)

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 GUARD POLYGON and then push the wheel or

the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF, STAB GND, STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as

appropriate and then the push the wheel or the left button.

OFF: Guard zone is a sector; number of points limited to four.

STAB GND: Guard zone stabilized against ground; guard zone may be a

polygon having 3-10 points.

STAB HDG: Guard zone stabilized against heading; guard zone may be

a polygon having 3-10 points.

STAB NORTH: Guard zone stabilized against ground; guard zone may be a

polygon having 3-10 points.

5. Push the right button twice to close menu.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-26

3.14 Operational Warnings

There are six main situations which cause the ARPA to trigger visual and audible

alarms:

•

Collision alarm

•

Guard zone alarm

•

Lost target alarm

•

Target full alarm for manual acquisition

•

Target full alarm for automatic acquisition

•

System failure

Collision (CPA/TCPA) alarm

Visual (COLLISION) and audible alarms are generated a target falls with a

preset limits. To acknowledge the audible alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key, or

choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button.

Guard zone alarm

Visual (“GUARD”) and audible alarms are generated when a target transits the

operator-set guard zone. To acknowledge and silence the guard alarm, press the

[ALARM ACK] key, or choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button.

Lost target alarm

When the system detects a loss of a tracked target, the target symbol becomes

a flashing diamond ( ) and the label “LOST” appears at the screen bottom. At

the same time, an audible alarm is produced for one second.

To acknowledge and silence the lost target audible alarm, press the [ALARM

ACK] key, or choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button. Then,

the lost target mark disappears.

Target full alarm

When the memory becomes full, the memory full status is indicated by

“TARGET-FULL(AUTO+MAN)” and the relevant indication appears on the

screen and a short beep sounds.

Manually acquired targets

The indication “TARGET-FULL(MAN)” appears at the screen bottom and a short

beep tone sounds when the capacity for manually acquired targets, as set on the

menu, is reached.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-27

Automatically acquired targets

The indication “TARGET-FULL(AUTO)” appears at the screen bottom and a

short beep sounds when the capacity for automatically acquired targets, as set

on the menu, is reached.

System failure alarm

When the SPU Board receives no signal input from the radar or external

equipment, the screen shows both “ARPA SYSTEM ERROR” associated with an

indication denoting offending equipment, also releasing an audible alarm. The

missing signals are denoted as shown below.

Missing Signal Indication

* Speed log signal LOG

* Heading signal, Gyrocompass GYRO

Trigger signal from radar TRIGGER

Video from radar VIDEO

* Bearing signal from radar antenna AZIMUTH

* Heading pulses from radar antenna HEADLINE

* The alarm is available with or without ARPA.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-28

3.15 Trial Maneuver

The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect on all tracked targets against

own ship's maneuver without interrupting the updating of target information.

3.15.1 Types of trial maneuvers

There are two types of trial maneuvers: static and dynamic.

Dynamic trial maneuver

A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted positions of the tracked targets and

own ship. You enter own ship's intended speed and course with a certain “delay

time.” Assuming that all tracked targets maintain their present speeds and

courses, the targets' and own ship's future movements are simulated in

one-second increments indicating their predicted positions in one-minute

intervals as illustrated below.

The delay time represents the time lag from the present time to the time when

own ship will actually start to change her speed and/or course. You should

therefore take into consideration own ship's maneuvering characteristics such as

rudder delay, turning delay and acceleration delay. This is particularly important

on large vessels. How much the delay is set the situation starts immediately and

ends in a minute.

In the example shown below, own ship will advance straight ahead (even after a

maneuver) for a delay time of 5 minutes and then alters speed and course until

operator-specified intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this

example).

OS0

OS1

OS2

OS3

OS4

OS5

OS6

OS7

OS8 B1

Present own

ship position

Delay time = 5 min.

Dynamic trial maneuver

Note that once a dynamic trial maneuver is initiated, you cannot alter own ship's

trial speed, course or delay time until the trial maneuver is terminated.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-29

[ARPA•AIS]

1 BACK

2 GUARD ZONE STAB

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

3 GUARD POLYGON

OFF/STAB GND/

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]

5 [ARPA SYMBOL]

6 [AIS SYMBOL]

7 [FUSION]

8 AIS FUNCTION

OFF/ON

Static trial maneuver

A static trial maneuver displays only the final situation of the simulation. If you

enter the same trial speed, course and delay time under the same situation as in

the aforementioned example of dynamic trial maneuver, the screen will instantly

show position OS7 for own ship, position A7 for target A and position B7 for

target B, omitting the intermediate positions. Thus, the static trial maneuver will

be convenient when you wish to know the maneuver result immediately.

Note: For accurate simulation of ship movements in a trial maneuver, own ship's

characteristics such as acceleration and turning performance should be

properly set in initial settings during the installation.

3.15.2 Performing a trial maneuver

To perform a trial maneuver, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the wheel or the left

button.

ARPA•AIS menu

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-30

[TRIAL MANEUVER]

1 BACK

2 TRIAL

OFF/STATIC/DYNAMIC

3 TRIAL SPEED RATE

0kt 0.00kt/s

4 TRIAL TURN RATE

0kt 0.0°/s

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 TRIAL MANEUVER and then push the wheel or

the left button.

TRIAL MANEUVER menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 TRIAL and then push the left button or the wheel.

5. Roll the wheel to choose STATIC or DYNAMIC as appropriate and then push

the wheel or the left button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 TRIAL SPEED RATE. Set trial speed rate with the

wheel: Roll the wheel to choose numeral; push the wheel to set.

7. Roll the wheel to choose 4 TRIAL TURN RATE. Set trial turn rate with the

wheel: Roll the wheel to choose numeral; push the wheel to set.

Note: Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided.

Enter the data by sets as shown in the figure below. This is done to

provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ship’s speed.

3 TRIAL SPEED RATE

TRIAL TURN RATE

Set 1

0kt 0.00kt/s

Set 2

Set 1

0kt 0.0 /s

Set 2

8. Push the right button three times to close the menu. Then, the TRIAL box

appears at the right side of the display.

TRIAL OFF

TRIAL box

9. Roll the trackball to choose the TRIAL box and then push the wheel or the

left button to display TRIAL SET. Then, the TRIAL box reads TRIAL SET and

boxes appear above the TRIAL box as below.

86.8°T

06.5kt

00:30

DELAY

TRIAL SET

Course for trial maneuver

Speed for trial maneuver

Delay time for trial maneuver

Trial maneuver status

Boxes for setting trial maneuver parameters

10. Use the wheel to set delay time at DELAY. This is the time after which own

ship takes a new situation, not the time the simulation begins. Change the

delay time according to own ship loading condition, etc. Roll the wheel to

choose location; push the wheel to set.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-31

11. Roll the wheel to choose the course setting box. Use the wheel to set the

course: Roll the wheel to choose location; push the wheel to set.

12. Roll the wheel to choose the speed setting box. Use the wheel to set the

speed: Roll the wheel to choose location; push the wheel to set.

13. Roll the wheel to choose TRIAL SET. Push the left button or the wheel to

show TRIAL WORK.

The trial maneuver takes place for three minutes with the letter “T” displayed

at the bottom of the screen. If any tracked target is predicted to be on a

collision course with own ship (that is, the target ship comes within preset

CPA/TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol changes to a triangle and

flashes. If this happens, change own ship's trial speed, course or delay time

to obtain a safe maneuver. The trial maneuver is automatically terminated

and the normal radar picture is restored three minutes later.

3.15.3 Terminating a trial maneuver

A trial maneuver is automatically terminated three minutes after start. To

terminate it manually, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the TRIAL box at the right side of the screen.

2. Push and hold down the left button to show TRIAL OFF.

Note: To disable the trial maneuver function, choose OFF at step 5 in the

procedure in paragraph 3.15.2 and then push the wheel or the left button.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-32

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK

2 [DATA BOX]

3 [F1]

4 [F2]

5 [F3]

6 [F4]

7 [OPERATION]

8 [TEST]

[TEST]

1 BACK

2 [SELF TEST]

3 [ARPA TEST]

[ARPA TEST]

1 BACK

2 ARPA TEST START

NOTE:

THE DISPLAY IS

CLEARER WHEN

RUNNING ARPA TEST.

RUN ARPA TEST?

YES: SELECT 2 START

3.16 ARPA Performance Test

A test program is provided for assessing overall performance of the ARPA.

Normal operation is suspended and the indication “XX” appears at the bottom of

the effective display area during the test. The test may be terminated at any

time.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel or

the left button.

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [TEST] and then push the wheel or the left button.

TEST menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 3 [ARPA TEST].

ARPA TEST menu

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-33

5. Roll the wheel to choose 2 ARPA TEST START and then push the wheel or

the left button to start the test.

An alert “XX” flickers during the test. It takes approximately three minutes for

all vectors to be displayed. The test does not need echo signals, gyro nor

speed log input. Three targets having different speeds and courses, as

shown in the table below, are simulated automatically, together with current

targets.

6. The test continues for five minutes and then repeats.

To terminate the test, press the [STBY TX] key or choose the TX STBY box at

the bottom left corner and then push the left button.

Select any target with the cursor and check that the selected target shows the

course and speed as in the table. CPA and TCPA shown in the table are initial

values which change with time.

Range(nm) Bearing(°) Speed(kt) Course(°)

Target A 4.0 45.0 20.0 0

Target B 2.0 120.0 5.0 120.0

Target C 7.0 270.0 10.0 90.0

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-34

3.17 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking

The FURUNO ARPA video processor detects targets in midst of noise and

discriminates radar echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo

measurements are greater than those of the largest ship in range or tangential

extent are usually land and are displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller

ship-sized echoes which are less than this dimension are further analyzed and

regarded as ships and displayed as small circles superimposed over the video

echo.

When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but

develops a course vector as more information is collected. In accordance with

the International Marine Organization Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (IMO ARPA)

requirements, an indication of the motion trend should be available within 20

scans of antenna and full vector accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO ARPAs

comply with these requirements.

Acquisition and tracking

A target which is hit by five consecutive radar pulses is detected as a radar echo.

Manual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball.

Automatic acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected

5-7 times continuously depending upon the congestion. Tracking is achieved

when the target is clearly distinguishable on the display for 5 out of 10

consecutive scans whether acquired automatically or manually. Required

tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 nm on range scales including 3, 6,

12 nm, full plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale

has been changed.

Targets not detected in five consecutive scans become “lost targets.”

Quantization

The entire picture is converted to a digital from called “Quantized Video.” A

sweep range is divided into small segments and each range element is “1” if

there is radar echo return above a threshold level, or “0” if there is no return.

The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As

the antenna scans, if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1’s indicating

an echo presence at the exact same range, a target “start” is initiated. Since

receiver noise is random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and

not classified as an echo.

The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closet

and most distant edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the

discriminator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular

extent subtended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in

range extent and/or angular width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared

to be a coastline and the closet edge is put into memory as a map of the area.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-35

This land outline is used to inhibit further acquisition and tracking of ship-sized

echoes beyond the closest coast outline. Five consecutive scans of coastal

outline are retained in memory to allow for signal variation. All smaller echoes

are declared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to

provide precise range and bearing coordinates of each echo on every scan. This

range/bearing data is matched to previous data and analyzed from scan-to-scan

for consistency. When it is determined to be as consistent as a real target,

automatic acquisition occurs and tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and

subsequent calculation develop the relative course and speed of the target.

The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and

speed inputs, and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily

computed by vector summing of the relative motion with own ship’s course and

speed. The resulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the tracked

targets. This process is updated continually for each target on every scan of the

radar.

Qualitative description of tracking error

The FURUNO ARPA accuracy complies with or exceed IMO standards.

Own ship maneuvers

For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than

150°/minute, depending on gyro), there is some influence on all tracked targets

which last for a minute or two and then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy.

Other ship maneuvers

Target ship courses, lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6

seconds at low (near 0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag,

but accuracy recovers quickly.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-36

3.18 Factors Affecting ARPA Functions

Sea returns

If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect

because distant wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by

more than one bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data.

Rain and snow

Clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the A/C RAIN control. If it

is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the interference rejector

on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual acquisition. Accuracy

can be affected.

Low clouds

Usually no effect. If necessary, adjust the A/C RAIN control.

Non-synchronous emissions

No effect.

Low gain

Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being

acquired at long distance. ARPA display will be missing on one or more targets

that could only be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were

increased.

The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should

be on the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined.

Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once.

Automatic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously.

Tracking is achieved when the target is detected five times (not necessarily

continuously) out of 10 scans. If not detected six times out of 10 scans, the

target will become a “lost target.” The ARPA will acquire a radar echo that is

present once in every six antenna scans and continue tracking if 1 in 10.

Second trace echoes

When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such

long ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted

pulse. This gives an incorrect range indication. Second and third trace echoes

can be tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking

criteria but target course and speed data will be in error.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-37

Blind and shadow sectors

Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard ship, for example,

funnels and masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar

beam intensity in that particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of

some targets. The ARPA system will lose track of targets shortly after they are

lost on the radar picture and if they remain in a blind zone. These targets will

however be acquired and tracked when they pass out of the blind zone and

again present normal radar echo. The angular width and bearing of any shadow

sector should be determined for their influence on the radar. In certain cases

false echoes in the shadow sector cause the ARPA system to acquire, track, and

vector them. Shadow sectors should be avoided.

Indirect echoes

A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received

as reflection from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two

or more echoes on the display, each at a different range. The ARPA can acquire

and track the false echo if it is detected by five consecutive scans. Reduction in

radar gain can eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range

detection also will be reduced.

Radar interference

If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral

“dotting” and/or false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector

can clear the display.

To receive radar beacon or SART signals, turn on “SART” in the ECHO menu.

3. ARPA OPERATION

3-38

(This page intentionally left blank.)

4-1

4 AIS OPERATION

The FURUNO AIS (Automatic Identification System) model FA-100 exchanges

with other AIS-fitted ships all data and information required by the SOLAS 1994

as amended. However, they are displayed in text form. By interfacing the FA-100

with this radar, the AIS information is graphically indicated together with the

radar and ARPA information.

4.1 Controls for AIS

Keyboard

The AIS uses the keys shown below.

ACQ

OFF

VRM

A/C SEAA/C RAIN

MODE

LINE

INDEX

OFF

CENTER

OFF

RESET

CU/TM

OFFSET

EBL

GAIN

TARGET

CANCEL

TARGET

DATA

RANGE

LIST

TARGET

MARK

ENTER

TIME

VECTOR

CANCEL

TRAILS

MODE

VECTOR

BRILL

EBL

OFF

POWER

ACK

ALARM

F3 F4

STBY

ACQ: Activates chosen AIS target.

TARGET DATA: Displays data on AIS target

selected by the trackball.

TARGET CANCEL: Sleeps chosen AIS target.



Control unit RCU-014

Trackball

With the cursor inside the effective display area, you can access AIS functions

by rolling the wheel or choosing appropriate AIS function from the CURSOR

menu.

Roll the wheel to show the following indications in the guidance box to access

respective AIS function:

TARGET DATA & ACQ: Activates chosen AIS target; displays target data for

AIS target chosen with the trackball.

TARGET CANCEL: Sleeps chosen AIS target.

ACQ: Activates chosen AIS target.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-2

[ARPA•AIS]

1 BACK

2 GUARD ZONE STAB

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

5 GUARD POLYGON

OFF/STAB GND/

STAB HDG/STAB NORTH

4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]

5 [ARPA SYMBOL]

6 [AIS SYMBOL]

7 [FUSION]

8 AIS FUNCTION

OFF/ON

4.2 Enabling/Disabling the AIS

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the wheel or the left

button.

ARPA•AIS menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 AIS FUNCTION and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

“AIS” appears at the lower right hand corner of the screen when the AIS function

is active.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-3

4.3 Turning AIS Display On/Off

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.

AIS

OFF

DISP

AIS DISP box

2. Push the left button to display AIS ON or AIS OFF as appropriate.

ON: All targets received from the AIS transponder are displayed with

symbols.

OFF: All AIS symbols disappear.

When the AIS is turned on, AIS targets are marked with appropriate AIS symbol

as below.

Activated target Sleeping target Dangerous target Lost target Target selected

for data display

AIS symbols

Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is

switched off. When the AIS is again turned on, symbols are immediately

displayed.

Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when

the heading is changed in the Head-up mode.

Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the message “RECEIVE” appears in the

text window. Check the AIS transponder.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-4

4.4 Activating Targets

When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, that target’s course

and speed are shown with a vector. You can easily judge target movement by

monitoring the vector.

4.4.1 Activating specific target

By keyboard

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the AIS target you wish activate.

2. Press the [ACQ] key to activate the target.

By trackball

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the sleeping AIS target you wish to

activate; that is, know more about a vessel’s motion.

3. Push the left button to activate the target.

Heading line#

SOG (Speed over Ground)

and COG (Course over Ground) vector

Turning direction

(ROT)

*1 = Vector shows STW (speed

thru water) and CSE

(course) when water

tracking mode is

selected at the radar.

# = If there is no heading data,

the line points in direction of COG.

Activated target

4.4.2 Activating all targets

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.

2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS and then push the wheel

or the left button.

4. Push the right button to close the menu.

Thicker than

activated target

Dangerous target

When an activated target violates the CPA/TCPA

alarm setting its symbol changes to the dangerous

target symbol (red and flashing) and the indication

COLLISON appears. Press the [ALARM ACK] key

(or click the ALARM ACK box with the left button)

to acknowledge the CPA/TCPA alarm. The audible

alarm is silenced and the symbol stops flashing.

Take appropriate action to avoid collision.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-5

[AIS TARGET MENU]

1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS

3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES

OFF/ON

4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]

8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]

4.5 Sleeping Targets

4.5.1 Sleeping an AIS target

You may “sleep” an AIS target as below when the screen becomes filled with

targets which might prevent important radar and AIS displays from being

identified. Note that targets that have been activated automatically cannot be

“slept.” (See paragraph 4.7.)

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“TARGET CANCEL / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on an activated AIS target symbol.

3. Push the left button. The activated target symbol should be replaced with the

sleeping target symbol.

Sleeping target

4.5.2 Sleeping all AIS targets

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.

2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.

AIS TARGET menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 1 SLEEP ALL TGTS.

4. Push the left button or the wheel to sleep all targets.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4-6

4.6 Displaying Target Data

You may display an AIS target’s data by selecting it on the display.

4.6.1 Basic data

By keyboard

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the AIS target symbol you want to

know its data.

2. Press the [TARGET DATA] key.

By trackball

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU”.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on an AIS target symbol and then push

the wheel or the left button. The selected target is marked with a broken

square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly

selected.

Activated target selected for data display

AIS TARGET NAME

FURUNO

BRG 208.6

T HDG

RNG 12.3NM 12.0

T CSE 9.0

T* ROT

/MIN

T SPD 8.2kt# 1.1R

CPA 5.32NM CALL

TCPA 33:31 143678

BCR 5.65NM MMSI

BCT 25:30 043109977

* = CSE (course) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.

# = STW (speed thru water) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.

Call sign

MMSI No.

Rate of turn

Heading

Bearing to target

Range to target

Target’s course

Target’s speed

Target’s CPA

Target’s TCPA

Target’s bow cross range

Target’s bow cross time

AIS data display

4. AIS OPERATION

4-7

4.6.2 Detailed target data

1. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the desired AIS target in the data box

at the right side of the screen.

2. Push the left button to show detailed data.

[EXPANDED DATA]

1 BACK

NAME:

VOYAGER

CALL: 143678

LAT: 34 44.2345’N

LON: 135 32.1890’E

POS. SNS:

GPS

POS. ACC.: HIGH

NAV. STATE: ANCHOR

MMSI No.: 107374182

IMO No.: 12354876

SHIP LENGTH: 187m

SHIP WIDTH: 28m

SHIP DRAFT: 12.2m

DESTINATION

Osaka

ETA: 01/FEB 12:59

AIS VERSION: 0

FUSION: OFF

TYPE OF SHIP

& CARGO TYPE:

DREDGING OR UNDER

WATER OPERATION

Ship’s name

Call sign

Latitude

Longitude

Position fixing device

Position accuracy (HIGH, LOW)

Navigation status

MMSI No.

IMO No.

Length

Width

Draft

Destination

Estimated Time of Arrival

AIS program no.

Fusion ON/OFF

Type of ship and cargo

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4-8

4.7 AIS Symbol Attributes

You may adjust the brilliance and choose the size and color of the AIS symbol.

4.7.1 AIS symbol brilliance

1. Roll the trackball to choose the BRILL box at the left side of the screen and

then push the right button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

[BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]

1 BACK

2 BRG CURSOR

3 EBL

4 VRM

5 INDEX LINE

6 ARPA SYMBOL

7 AIS SYMBOL

8 L/L GRID

9 MARK

0 CHART

BRILL menu, page 2

3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 AIS SYMBOL and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to adjust brilliance.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-9

[AIS SYMBOL]

1 BACK

2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR

RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE

SMALL/STD/LARGE

4 ROT TAG LIMIT

000.1°/min

5 PAST POSN COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

6 PAST POSN POINTS

5/10

4.7.2 AIS symbol size and color

You may choose the size and color of the AIS symbol as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 [ARPA•AIS] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [AIS SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

AIS SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel or the left

button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE and then push the wheel or

the left button.

7. Roll the wheel to choose SMALL, STD(Standard) or LARGE as appropriate

and then push the wheel or the left button.

8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

:* Not available

on IMO radar.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4-10

4.8 Past Position Display

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions

of activated AIS targets. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the

preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be

uneven. If it changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.

Below are sample past position displays.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running

straight

speed

(d) Ship increased

speed

Sample past position displays

4.8.1 Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past

position plot interval

1. Roll the trackball to choose the PAST POSN box at the right side of the

screen.

PAST POSN REL 2MIN

PAST POSN box

2. Push the left button to choose plot interval desired: OFF, 30 s, 1, 2, 3 or 6

min. Choose OFF to erase all past position points and turn off the past

position display.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-11

[AIS SYMBOL]

1 BACK

2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR

RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE

SMALL/STD/LARGE

4 ROT TAG LIMIT

000.1°/min

5 PAST POSN COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

6 PAST POSN POINTS

5/10

4.8.2 Past position display attributes

You may choose the number of past position points to show per plot interval and

the color of past position points.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [AIS SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

AIS SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PAST POSN COLOR and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel or the left

button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 6 PAST POSN POINTS and then push the wheel or

the left button.

7. Roll the wheel to choose 5 or 10 as appropriate and then push the wheel or

the left button.

8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

*: Not available

on IMO radar.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4-12

4.9 Lost Target

A target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or

five reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter. When this occurs, the target is

marked with the (flashing) lost target symbol and the indication “LOST” appears.

To acknowledge a lost target, press the [ALARM ACK] key or roll the trackball to

choose the ALARM ACK box and then push the left button.

Lost target

Note 1: If an ARPA lost target mark is displayed when the [ALARM ACK] key is

pressed (or the ALARM ACK box is clicked) to acknowledge an AIS lost

target, the ARPA lost target will also be erased.

Note 2: The AIS data transmission interval depends on target’s speed. For

example, the data is transmitted every 10 seconds on ship speed of 0

to 14 kt and every two seconds on the ship speed of more than 23 knots.

For details see the owner’s manual of the AIS.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-13

[AIS SYMBOL]

1 BACK

2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR

RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE

SMALL/STD/LARGE

4 ROT TAG LIMIT

000.1°/min

5 PAST POSN COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

6 PAST POSN POINTS

5/10

4.10 ROT Setting

You may set the lower limit of the ROT (Rate Of Turn) at which the heading line

on target symbols will point in direction of turning of the vessel.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [AIS SYMBOL] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

AIS SYMBOL menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ROT TAG LIMIT and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Use the numeral keys or the wheel to enter ROT (setting range: 0.1 to

720.0°/min).

6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

Ship turning

to port

ROT display

*: Not available

on IMO radar.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4-14

[FUSION]

1 BACK

2 FUSION TARGET

OFF/ON

3 GAP

0.000NM

4 RANGE

0.000NM

5 BEARING

00.0°

6 SPEED

0.0KT

7 COURSE

0.0°

4.11 Fusion of ARPA and AIS Targets

An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the radar display.

This is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) on

that ship whereas the radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and

bearing relative to own ship radar antenna).

To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, the

“fusion” function is incorporated. If target data from AIS and from radar plotting

functions are available and if the fusion criteria is fulfilled, only the activated AIS

target symbol is presented.

1. Confirm that the ARPA ACQ MODE box shows AUTO or AUTO MANU.

2. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 ARPA•AIS and then push the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [FUSION] and then push the left button.

FUSION menu

5. Roll the wheel to choose FUSION TARGET and then push the wheel.

6. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel.

7. Enter the information below, pushing the wheel (or the [MARK ENTER] key)

after entering each data. This information will be used to determine which

ARPA targets to convert.

GAP: Range between AIS target and ARPA target.

(setting range: 0.000-0.999(nm))

RANGE: Enter the range difference from own ship to AIS target and ARPA

target. (setting range: 0.000-0.999(nm))

BEARING: Enter the bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and

ARPA target. (setting range: 0.0-9.9(°))

SPEED: Enter the speed difference between AIS target and ARPA target.

(setting range: 0.0-9.9(kt))

COURSE: Enter the course difference between AIS target and ARPA target.

(setting range: 0.0-9.9(°))

8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-15

When the fusion criteria is met, the ARPA symbol is erased and only the AIS

symbol is displayed. Further, “ARPA FUSION” appears at the bottom right corner

of the display at the time of conversion and the ARPA target no. appears next to

the AIS symbol. An ARPA target whose speed is less than 1 kt is converted to an

AIS target if it meets all criteria other than course.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4-16

4.12 AIS System Messages

AIS system messages are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen.

The table below shows the AIS system messages and their meanings.

AIS system messages

Message Meaning

ARPA FUSION ARPA target merged with AIS target. The indication

disappears when the target no longer meets the criteria

set in paragraph 4.11. When the message “RECEIVE” is

displayed, ARPA FUSION is not displayed.

COLLISION CPA and TCPA of an activated AIS target are below

value set on the menu.

TARGET-FULL Displayed when 1000 AIS targets have been received.

(The radar can only display 1000 AIS targets closest in

range to own ship.)

LOST Lost target. A target is declared a lost target when a

dangerous target fails to produce data for six minutes or

five reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter.

RECEIVE Not receiving AIS data.

GUARD Displayed when an AIS target enters the guard zone.

CPA/TCPA CPA/TCPA cannot be calculated. Further the CPA/TCPA

value in the basic data display is marked with an

asterisk to indicate that it is not reliable.

AIS ALARM Alarm received from AIS transponder.

4. AIS OPERATION

4-17

[AIS TARGET MENU]

1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS

3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES

OFF/ON

4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]

8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]

[RECEIVED MESSAGES]

(1/1)

1 BACK

2 09DEC2003 12:34

ADDRESSED SAFETY

MMSI: 107374182

0 NEXT

4.13 Viewing AIS Messages

When an AIS message is received, the display shows an appropriate icon to

alert you. If you are set up to automatically display AIS messages they are

automatically displayed upon receipt. The system stores up to 20 AIS messages.

When the storage capacity is reached the oldest AIS message is automatically

erased to make room for the latest. Note that received messages and alarm

messages are not backed up when the power is turned off.

4.13.1 Manually viewing received AIS messages

To view received AIS messages do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the display.

2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.

AIS TARGET menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 RECEIVED MESSAGES and then push the

wheel or the left button. (Up to five received messages are displayed.)

RECEIVED MESSAGES menu

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

4-18

NAME: FURUNO

CALL: 112233

STORM WARNING VICINITY

OF 35°N 135°W

4. Roll the wheel to choose the message which you want to see and then push

the wheel or the left button.

Example of received AIS message (max. 180 characters)

5. Press the right button several times to close the message and the menu.

4.13.2 Automatically displaying AIS messages

You can display AIS messages upon receipt as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the display.

2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES and then push the

wheel or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON as appropriate and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

When a message arrives the message arrival icon ( ) appears at the right-hand

side of the display. Click the icon with the left button to show the message.

4.13.3 Manually viewing AIS alarm messages

The transponder outputs various alarm messages. You can view them as

follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the AIS DISP box at the right side of the display.

2. Push the right button to open the AIS TARGET menu.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 AIS ALM MESSAGES and then push the wheel or

the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON as appropriate and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

5-1

5 VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.1 General

The video plotter

•

Plots own and other ships’ tracks

•

Enters waypoints nav lines and marks

•

Records data onto memory cards (optional card interface required).

It uses two types of memory cards, a memory card (RAM card) for storing own

ship and other ship’s tracks and marks, and a digital chart card (ROM card).

30 nav lines may be stored and each line may contain up to 30 waypoints. Five

nav lines may be simultaneously shown on the display. 200 waypoints are

available. Own ship and other ship tracks may be stored at a selected interval.

Charts are superimposed on the radar picture without disturbing the radar

observation. The chart area is dependent on the radar range in use.

5.2 Display Modes

This radar has two display modes: Radar and Radar + Video Plotter. Use the

DISPLAY MODE box to choose a mode. (When the video plotter mode is

displayed more than five seconds, the radar automatically goes into standby.)

Note 1: Display mode cannot be chosen when the menu is open. Close the

menu to choose a display mode.

Note 2: Only the radar display is available on the IMO-type radar.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-2

Sample video plotter display

000 010 020

030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330

340 350

W012

W011

North marker

Heading marker

Waypoint

Navline

Own ship safe contour

Heading line

Planned route

Own ship vector

Approximate coastline

Waypoint

Past position

ARPA/AIS: Equally time-spaced positions of any targets being tracked.

Target being tracked

Separation zone

Dangerous side of own

ship safe contour may be

marked like this (hatched

line).

AIS activated target

Video plotter display

5.3 Presentation Modes

Five presentation modes are available: North-up, Course-up, Head-up, Head-up

TB (True Bearing) and North-up TM (True Motion). To choose a mode, use the

[MODE] key or choose the PRESENTATION MODE box and then push the left

button. For a description of the presentation modes, see paragraph 1.12.

Note 1: Chart data is not displayed on the HEAD UP and HEAD UP TB modes.

Note 2: The screen may flash when the heading is changed more than one

degree in the HEAD UP or HEAD UP TB mode.

Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode

In the true motion mode, the own ship mark is automatically returned sternward

75% from the screen center when it reaches a location 75% of the display

radius.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-3

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL

CYA/MAG/WHT

5.4 Radar Map

A radar map is a combination of map lines and symbols whereby the user can

define and input the navigation data, route planning and monitoring data.

The radar map may contain 3,000 points of data. The map data can be

memorized to facilitate repeated use on a routine navigation area.

The user can create a radar map on-real time while using the radar for

navigation or at leisure time at anchor or while the radar is not being used. Place

of a map can be made for any waterways apart from the actual own ship

location.

The radar map feature is available with the non-IMO radar. All radar map

functions are accessed from the radar display. To choose the radar display, use

the trackball to choose the DISPLAY MODE box and push the left button to

display “RADAR.” Then, follow the procedures in this section to create a radar

map.

5.4.1 Turning on the radar map display

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box.

2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 MAP DISPLAY and then push the wheel.

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button to close the menu.

*: NOT available

on IMO radar.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-4

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL

CYA/MAG/WHT

5.4.2 Inscribing radar map marks and lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the display.

MARK >

Mark type -> +

MARK box

2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK KIND and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose MAP MARK and then push the wheel or the left

button.

Note: For non-IMO type radars you may specify mark color by choosing 0

MAP MARK COLOR, pushing the wheel and the choosing color

desired.

5. Push the right button to close the menu. The guidance box now reads

“MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”

6. With the cursor choosing the MARK box, roll the wheel to choose the mark or

line type you wish to inscribe and then push the left button. See the next

page for available marks.

7. Push the left button again. The cursor jumps into the effective display area

and the guidance box now reads “MARK / EXIT.”

8. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the location desired. (You can see the

range and bearing from own ship to the cursor location by monitoring the

bearing and range indication just below the MARK box.)

9. Push the left button to inscribe the mark or line point.

*: NOT available

on IMO radar.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-5

•

To continue entering the same mark or line (with the guidance box showing

“MARK / EXIT”), roll the trackball to choose location and then push the left

button.

•

To quit entering marks or lines, push the right button when the guidance box

reads “MARK / EXIT.”

Non-IMO IMO

Orange

Available in seven colors Red

Purple

Available in seven colors Green

Red

Available in seven colors Red

Red

Available in seven colors Green

Red

Available in seven colors Red

Red

Available in seven colors Green

Orange

Available in seven colors Red

Purple

Available in seven colors Green

Orange

Available in seven colors Purple

Orange

Available in seven colors Purple

Orange

Available in seven colors Orange

Orange

Available in seven colors Orange

Orange

Available in seven colors Orange

Orange

Available in seven colors Purple NAV LINE

Orange

Available in seven colors White COAST LINE

Purple NAV LINE

Available in seven colors Gray CONTOUR LINE

White COAST LINE

Available in seven colors Purple PROHIBITED AREAS

Gray CONTOUR LINE

Available in seven colors Purple CABLE

Purple PROHIBITED AREAS

Available in seven colors Orange

Purple CABLE

Available in seven colors Orange

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-6

5.5 Erasing Radar Map Marks and Lines

A total of 3,000 points is allotted for radar map marks and lines. When this

amount is exceeded, no more map marks or lines may be entered unless you

erase unnecessary marks or lines.

5.5.1 Erasing individual radar map marks and lines

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show

“MARK DELETE / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the radar map mark or line you wish

to erase.

3. Push the left button to erase selected mark or line.

Note: When erasing a line, the cursor location determines how the line will

be erased. To erase a single line segment, place the cursor on the

starting (or ending point depending on the line) of the line. To erase

two consecutive line segments, place the cursor at the junction

between the line segments.

Connecting point of lines

These line segments are erased.

Starting/ending point of line

This line segment is erased.

Cursor location and line processing

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-7

[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK

2 OWN TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

3 TARGET TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

4 MARK ALL ERASE

5 WP ALL ERASE

6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE

5.5.2 Erasing all radar map marks and lines

You can erase all radar map marks and lines from the screen as below. Be

absolutely sure you want to erase all map marks and lines – erased marks and

lines cannot be restored.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 4 MARK ALL ERASE.

5. Push the wheel or the left button to erase all marks.

6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-8

[PLOTTER]

1 BACK

2 CHART COLOR

GRN/YEL/CYA

ORANGE/GRAY

3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL

OFF/10S/30S/

1M/2M/3M/6M

4 OWN TRACK COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL

10S/30S/1M/

2M/3M/6M

6 TGT TRACK COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN

OFF/ON

8 [DATA ERASE]

9 [DISPLAY]

5.6 Radar Map Corrections

5.6.1 Radar map correction

When there is positional error between the radar screen and radar map marks

and lines, do the following to correct it.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Operate the trackball to align the radar map with the radar screen.

3. Push the left button to set. “MAN ALIGNED” appears at the right side of the

screen.

To release the radar map correction, display “CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT” in

the guidance box and then push the left button until “MAN ALIGNED” disappears

from the screen.

5.6.2 Cursor data correction

You can correct cursor data as below.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

PLOTTER menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-9

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.

“ALIGN” appears (in red) next to cursor position in the text area. (To remove

the correction, choose OFF. If you are using the AIS function, choose ON.)

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5.7 Chart Cards

Charts may be overlaid on the radar image when the radar is interfaced with the

optional Card I/F Unit CU-100.

CAUTION

Handle chart cards and memory cards

with care.

Keep cards away from direct sunlight,

heat sources, and active gases.

Keep cards away from water and

chemicals.

Keep the connector free foreign

material.

Do not drop the cards.

Chart cards are intended as an aid to

navigation. The navigator has the

responsibility to check all aids available

to confirm position.

5.7.1 Displaying a chart

To display a chart:

1. Insert a chart card in either of the two card slots in the Card I/F Unit CU-100.

Card Slot

Card slot location

2. Press the [POWER] button on the control unit to turn the power on. With the

radar in transmit status, choose the radar display NU, CU, TM modes only)

or the radar/video plotter display to display the chart.

To display a chart after the power has been turned on, change the range by

pressing the [RANGE+] or [RANGE-] key or operating the RANGE box.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-10

[PLOTTER]

1 BACK

2 CHART COLOR

GRN/YEL/CYA

ORANGE/GRAY

3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL

OFF/10S/30S/

1M/2M/3M/6M

4 OWN TRACK COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL

10S/30S/1M/

2 M/3M/6M

6 TGT TRACK COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN

OFF/ON

8 [DATA ERASE]

9 [DISPLAY]

5.7.2 Chart position correction

There may be a case where the chart overlay is not aligned with the radar image.

This is due to an error in the position fixing system (GPS, Loran, etc.) or the

different coordinates between the position fixing system and the radar. In this

case, align the chart with the radar image as below.

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Operate the trackball to align the chart with the radar map. Note that track is

neither recorded nor displayed at this point.

3. Push the left button to set. “CHART ALIGN” appears (in red) at the right side

of the screen.

To release the chart position correction, display “CHART ALIGN L=OFF /

EXIT” in the guidance box and then push the left button until “CHART ALIGN”

disappears from the screen.

5.7.3 Correcting cursor data

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the left button.

PLOTTER menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-11

[PLOTTER]

1 BACK

2 CHART COLOR

GRN/YEL/CYA

ORANGE/GRAY

3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL

OFF/10S/30S/

1M/2M/3M/6M

4 OWN TRACK COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL

10S/30S/1M/

2 M/3M/6M

6 TGT TRACK COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN

OFF/ON

8 [DATA ERASE]

9 [DISPLAY]

4. Roll the wheel to choose ON and then push the wheel or the left button.

“ALIGN” appears (in red) next to cursor position in the cursor data box. (To

remove the correction, choose OFF. If you are using the AIS function, choose

ON.)

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5.7.4 Chart land color

You may choose the color for the land on charts as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the left button.

PLOTTER menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 CHART COLOR and then push the left button or

the wheel.

4. Choose color desired and push the wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-12

5.8 Hiding/Showing Graphics on the Video Plotter

Display

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [DISPLAY] and then push the wheel or the left

button. Roll the wheel to choose an item and then push the wheel or the left

button. To go to page 2, choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left

button. You may return to page 1 by choosing 1 BACK and pressing the

wheel or the left button.

[DISPLAY (1/2)]

1 BACK

2 GRID

OFF/ON

3 OWN TRACK

OFF/ON

4 TARGET TRACK

OFF/ON

5 MARK

OFF/ON

6 LAND DENSITY

OFF/ON

7 PLACE NAME

OFF/ON

8 COAST LINE

OFF/ON

9 CONTOUR LINE

OFF/ON

0 NEXT

[DISPLAY (2/2)]

1 BACK

2 NAV LINE(MAP)

OFF/ON

3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT

OFF/ON

4 PROHIBITED AREA

OFF/ON

5 BUOY

OFF/ON

Page 1

Page 2

Choose

0 NEXT

to show

page 2.

DISPLAY menus

4. Push the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate.

Note:

LAND DENSITY fills (ON) or hollows (OFF) land on an electronic chart.

Land will be hollow when wrong card or wrong scale is used,

regardless of LAND DENSITY setting.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set other items.

6. Push the right button three or four times to close the menu depending on

which page of the DISPLAY menu you are using.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-13

[PLOTTER]

1 BACK

2 CHART COLOR

GRN/YEL/CYA

ORANGE/GRAY

3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL

OFF/10S/30S/

1M/2M/3M/6M

4 OWN TRACK COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL

10S/30S/1M/

2 M/3M/6M

6 TGT TRACK COLOR

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN

OFF/ON

8 [DATA ERASE]

9 [DISPLAY]

5.9 Track

5.9.1 Plotting own ship’s track

A total of 6,000 points are allotted for storage of own ship’s track, marks and

lines. When this memory becomes full, the oldest track is deleted to make room

for the latest. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval to

conserve the memory.

The table below shows the relation between plotting interval and maximum track

recording time.

Own track plotting interval and storage time

Interval Max. Recording Time Interval Max. Recording Time

10 s 55 hr 30 min 2 min 27 days 18 hr 40 min

30 s 166 hr 40 min 3 min 41 days 16 hr

1 min 13 days 21 hr 20 min 6 min 83 days 8 hr

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

PLOTTER menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL and then push the

wheel or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate track plotting interval and then push the

wheel or the left button. Choose OFF to stop plotting own ship’s track.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-14

5.9.2 Plotting other ships’ track

The tracks of 10 targets (other ships) can be recorded. The memory capacity for

other ships’ track is 20,000 points, but this value is divided equally among ten

targets, so there are 2,000 points per target. When the other ships’ track memory

becomes full the oldest track is deleted to make room for the latest. For that

reason you may want to adjust the recording interval to conserve the memory.

Note that the track of ARPA targets 1 thru 10 may be displayed. The track of

ARPA targets 11 thru 30 cannot be displayed.

The table below shows the relation between plotting interval and maximum track

recording time for other ships’ track.

Other target plot interval and storage time

Interval Max. Recording Time Interval Max. Recording Time

10 s 5 hrs 33 min 2 min 66 hrs 40 min

30 s 16 hrs 40 min 3 min 100 hrs

1 min 33 hrs 20 min 6 min 200 hrs

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL and then push the wheel

or the left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate track plotting interval and then push the

wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5.9.3 Choosing track color

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 4 OWN TRACK COLOR or 6 TGT TRACK COLOR,

whichever track color you want to set, and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose color desired and then push the wheel or the left

button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-15

[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK

2 OWN TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

3 TARGET TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

4 MARK ALL ERASE

5 WP ALL ERASE

6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE

5.9.4 Erasing track

The display may become full of track when, for example, own ship traces the

same route several times or there are many tracks from other ships. You can

erase all or a percentage of your track or other tracks to clear the display.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 OWN TRACK or 3 TARGET TRACK, whichever

track you want to erase, and then push the wheel or the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose the percentage of track to erase and then push the

wheel or the left button. For example, “30” erases the oldest 30% of the track

selected at step 4. Choose “ALL” to erase all of the corresponding track.

6. Push the right button three times close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-16

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL

CYA/MAG/WHT

5.10 Marks and Lines

You can inscribe marks on the display to denote important points, for example, a

buoy or a wreck. The memory for marks, lines and own ship’s track is 6,000

points.

5.10.1 Inscribing marks and lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the screen.

MARK >

Mark type -> +

162 5 T117

Mark box

2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK KIND and then push the wheel or the left

button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose MAP MARK and then push the wheel or the left

button.

Note: For non-IMO type radars you may specify mark color by choosing 0

MAP MARK COLOR, pushing the wheel and the choosing color

desired.

5. Push the right button to close the menu. The guidance box now reads

“MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”

*: Not available

on IMO radar.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-17

6. With the MARK box selected, roll the wheel to choose mark desired and then

push the left button. See the list on page 5-5 for available marks.

7. Push the left button again. The cursor jumps into the effective display area

and the guidance box reads “MARK / EXIT.”

8. Roll the trackball to place the cursor where you want to inscribe a mark and

then push the left button to inscribe the mark. (You can see the range and

bearing to the cursor location by monitoring the mark range and bearing

indication just below the MARK box.)

•

To continue inscribing the same mark, repeat step 8.

•

To enter a different mark, push the right button when the guidance box reads

“MARK / EXIT” and then do steps 6-8. (“MAP MARK” should be chosen on the

MARK menu beforehand.)

•

To quit entering marks, push the right button when the guidance box reads

“MARK / EXIT”.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-18

5.11 Erasing Marks and Lines

Up to 6,000 points of own ship’s track, marks and lines may be entered. When

this amount is exceeded no more marks or lines can be entered unless

unnecessary marks, lines or track are erased.

5.11.1 Erasing individual marks/lines

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to show

“MARK DELETE / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the mark or line you wish to erase. A

flashing “X” appears on the mark when it is correctly selected.

3. Push the left button to erase.

Note: When erasing a line, the cursor location determines how the line will

be erased. To erase a single line segment, place the cursor on the

starting (or ending point depending on the line) of the line. To erase

two consecutive line segments, place the cursor at the junction

between the line segments.

Connecting point of lines

These line segments are erased.

Starting/ending point of line

This line segment is erased.

Cursor location and line erasure

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-19

[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK

2 OWN TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

3 TARGET TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

4 MARK ALL ERASE

5 WP ALL ERASE

6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE

5.11.2 Erasing all marks and lines

To erase all plotter marks and lines from the memory, follow the procedure

below.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 4 MARK ALL ERASE.

5. Push the wheel or the left button to erase all plotter-related marks and lines.

6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-20

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL

CYA/MAG/WHT

5.12 Waypoints

A particular location is known as a “waypoint,” whether it be a starting point, a

destination point or an intermediate point on a voyage. This unit can store 200

waypoints, numbered 001 to 200. Waypoints may be entered with the cursor or

by input of latitude and longitude.

5.12.1 Entering waypoints

Entering waypoints with the cursor

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MARK box at the left side of the screen.

MARK

Mark type last

selected, mark

number

> +

162.5 T 11.7

Bearing and range from

own ship to waypoint

MARK box

2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.

MARK menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 MARK KIND and then push the wheel.

4. Roll the wheel to choose the WPT item which best matches the waypoint

number you wish to enter and then push the wheel or the left button. For

example, if you want to enter waypoint number 59, choose “WPT 51-100.”

5. Push the right button to close the menu. The guidance box now reads

“MARK SELECT / MARK MENU.”

6. With the MARK box selected, roll the wheel to display waypoint number

desired and then push the left button. The cursor jumps into the effective

display area and the guidance box reads “MARK / EXIT.”

*: Not available

on IMO radar.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-21

[NAV LINE•WPT (1/2)]

1 BACK

2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE

OFF/EXT DATA/

INTERNAL DATA/

WPT MARK

3 NAV LINE SELECT

- -

4 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM

OFF/ON 0.00NM

5 NAV LINE WIDTH

0.0NM

6 [WPT SET]

7 [WPT LIST]

8 [NAV LINE SET]

9 [NAV LINE LIST]

0 NEXT

7. Roll the trackball to place the cursor where you want to inscribe a waypoint

mark and then push the left button to inscribe the mark. The waypoint mark

(“ ” + waypoint number) appears at the location selected. (You can see the

range and bearing to the cursor location by monitoring the mark range and

bearing indication just below the MARK box.)

•

To enter another waypoint, push the right button when the guidance box reads

“MARK / EXIT” and then repeat steps 6-8. (“WPT” should be chosen on the

MARK menu.)

•

To quit entering waypoints, push the right button when the guidance box reads

“MARK / EXIT.”

Entering waypoints by manual input of latitude and longitude

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

NAV LINE•WPT menu

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-22

[WPT SET]

1 BACK

2 WPT NO. SELECT

000

3 WPT NAME

4 WPT L/L

00°00.000 N

000°00.000 E

5 CLEAR DATA

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [WPT SET] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

WPT SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 WPT NO. SELECT and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. Use the wheel to choose waypoint number: Roll the wheel to choose location

and then push the wheel to set.

6. To enter waypoint name, follow the procedure below. If you do not require

waypoint name go to step 7.

1) Roll the wheel to choose 3 WPT NAME and then push the wheel or the left

button.

2) Roll the wheel to choose alphanumeric character desired and then push the

wheel.

3) Repeat step 2 to complete the waypoint name. You may use up to 15

alphanumeric characters for waypoint name.

7. Roll the wheel to choose 4 WPT L/L and then push the wheel or the left

button.

8. Enter latitude and longitude position as follows:

1) Roll the wheel to choose location desired and then push the wheel. (The

wheel may be pushed again to skip a place.) For input by keyboard, press

appropriate numeric keys and then press the [ENTER MARK] key.

2) To switch co-ordinate polarity, roll the wheel or use the [2] key in case of

keyboard operation.

9. To enter another waypoint, repeat steps 4-8.

10. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-23

[WPT SET]

1 BACK

2 WPT NO. SELECT

000

3 WPT NAME

4 WPT L/L

00°00.000 N

000°00.000 E

5 CLEAR DATA

5.12.2 Editing, erasing waypoints from the menu

You may edit or erase waypoints from the menu as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [WPT SET] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

WPT SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 WPT NO. SELECT and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. Use the wheel to enter waypoint number you wish to edit and then push the

wheel or the left button. Then, do one of the following:

•

To change the waypoint name, roll the wheel to choose 3 WPT NAME

and then push the wheel or the left button. Use the wheel to edit waypoint

name.

•

To edit the waypoint position, roll the wheel to choose 4 WPT L/L and

then push the wheel or the left button. Use the wheel to edit waypoint

position.

•

To erase the waypoint, roll the wheel to choose 5 CLEAR DATA and then

push the wheel or the left button.

6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-24

[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK

2 OWN TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

3 TARGET TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

4 MARK ALL ERASE

5 WP ALL ERASE

6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE

5.12.3 Erasing waypoints

Waypoints may be erased individually or collectively.

Erasing individual waypoints

1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the wheel to display

“MARK DELETE / EXIT” in the guidance box.

2. Roll the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you wish to erase. A

flashing “+” appears on the mark when it is correctly selected.

3. Push the left button or the wheel to erase the waypoint.

4. To erase another waypoint, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5. To finish, push the right button when the guidance reads “MARK DELETE /

EXIT”.

Erasing all waypoints

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 5 WPT ALL ERASE.

5. Push the wheel or the left button to erase all waypoints.

6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-25

[WPT LIST (1/25)]

1 BACK

001 001

34°42.110 N

136°31.580 E

002 002

33°97.690 N

134°64.350 E

003

004

0 NEXT

5.12.4 Waypoint list

The waypoint list stores position data of all registered waypoints. Each page of

the waypoint list holds eight waypoints.

To display the waypoint list:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 NAV LINE•WPT and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 7 [WPT LIST] and then push the wheel or the left

button. Asterisks indicate no data.

WPT list

4. To go to a next page, choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left

button.

5. Push the right button several times to close the waypoint list and the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-26

[NAV LINE•WPT (2/2)]

1 BACK

2 SKIP NEXT WPT

3 TURNING LINE

OFF/ON/REVISED

4 DISP WPT NO.

OFF/ON

5 DISP WPT NAME

OFF/ON

5.12.5 Displaying waypoint name and number

You may turn waypoint name and number display on or off as desired.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

NAV LINE•WPT menu (2/2)

4. Roll the wheel to choose 4 DISP WPT NO. and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 5 DISP WPT NAME and then push the wheel or the

left button.

7. Roll the wheel to choose OFF or ON as appropriate and then push the wheel

or the left button.

8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-27

[NAV LINE SET]

1 BACK

2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT

3 NAV LINE NAME

4 NAV LINE ENTRY

— — —

5 CLEAR DATA

5.13 Nav Lines

30 nav lines may be entered, and each line may have up to 30 waypoints.

5.13.1 Entering new nav line

To enter a nav line, first enter appropriate waypoints. Then, do the following:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE SET] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

NAV LINE SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Use the wheel to enter nav line no., in two digits.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 3 NAV LINE NAME and then push the wheel or the

left button.

7. Use the wheel to enter a name.

8. Roll the wheel to choose 4 NAV LINE ENTRY and then push the wheel or left

button.

9. Use the wheel to enter waypoint numbers (in three digits): Roll the wheel to

choose numeral and push it to set.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-28

10. To enter another nav line, roll the wheel to choose 0 BACK to return to the

NAV LINE SET menu and then repeat steps 4-9.

11. To finish, push the right button several times to close the menu.

5.13.2 Editing nav lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE SET] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Use the wheel to enter nav line number to edit and then push the wheel or

the left button.

6. To edit nav line name, roll the wheel to choose 3 NAV LINE NAME and then

push the wheel or the left button. Use the wheel to change name.

7. To replace waypoints in a nav line, do the following:

1) Roll the wheel to choose 4 [NAV DATA ENTRY] and then push the wheel or

the left button.

2) Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE WPT and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3) Push the wheel to choose the waypoint you wish to replace.

4) Roll the wheel to set new waypoint number.

5) Push the wheel to finish.

8. Push the right button several times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-29

[NAV LINE LIST (1/30)]

1 BACK

001—002—003

004—005—006

— — —

0 NEXT

5.13.3 Nav line list

The nav line list, which shows all nav lines registered, may be displayed as

follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [NAV LINE LIST] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

NAV LINE LIST

4. To go to a next page choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left

button. To return to a previous page, choose 1 BACK and then push the

wheel or the left button.

5. Push the right button as many times as necessary to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-30

[NAV LINE SET]

1 BACK

2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT

3 NAV LINE NAME

4 NAV LINE ENTRY

— — —

— ——

— — —

LEAR DATA

5.13.4 Erasing nav lines

30 nav lines may be entered. You may erase unnecessary nav lines as shown

below. A nav line which is currently in use cannot be erased.

Erasing individual nav lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box at the right side of the screen and

then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE SET] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

NAV LINE SET menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT and then push the wheel

or the left button.

5. Use the wheel to enter nav line no., in two digits.

6. Roll the wheel to choose 5 CLEAR DATA.

7. Push the wheel or the left button to delete the nav line.

8. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-31

[DATA ERASE]

1 BACK

2 OWN TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

3 TARGET TRACK

30%/50%/80%/ALL

4 MARK ALL ERASE

5 WPT ALL ERASE

6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE

[NAV LINE•WPT (1/2)]

1 BACK

2 NAV LINE DATA

OFF/EXT DATA/

INTERNAL DATA/

WPT MARK

3 NAV LINE SELECT

4 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM

OFF/ON 0.00NM

5 NAV LINE WIDTH

0.00NM

6 [WPT SET]

7 [WPT LIST]

8 [NAV LINE SET]

9 [NAV LINE LIST]

0 NEXT

Erasing all nav lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 5 PLOTTER and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [DATA ERASE] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

DATA ERASE menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE.

5. Push the wheel or the left button to erase all nav lines and their data.

6. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5.13.5 Setting up nav lines

Nav lines can be set up as follows:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

NAV LINE•WPT menu (1/2)

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE DATA and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-32

[NAV LINE•WPT (2/2)]

1 BACK

2 SKIP NEXT WPT

3 TURNING LINE

OFF/ON/REVISED

4 DISP WPT NO.

OFF/ON

5 DISP WPT NAME

OFF/ON

4. Roll the wheel to choose INTERNAL DATA and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose 5 NAV LINE WIDTH.

6. Use the wheel to enter the width for the nav line, from 0.0-9.9(nm). A pair of

red lines mark the width of the nav line.

7. If you want to be alerted when own ship nears a waypoint by a preset

distance, roll the wheel to choose 4 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM and then push

the wheel or the left button. Push the wheel to choose ON.

8. Use the wheel to enter the arrival alarm range, in three digits.

9. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

NAV LINE•WPT menu (2/2)

10. Roll the wheel to choose 3 TURNING LINE and then push the wheel or the

left button.

11. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate option and then push the wheel or the

left button.

OFF: Turns turning lines off.

ON: Use this setting when the vessel is not to correct cross track error to return

to course set, after arriving at turning line location.

REVISED: Use this setting when vessel is to return to course set after correcting

cross track error, after arriving at turning line location.

Own ship

Turning line

Course

Nav

line

Track

Turning line

TURNING LINE: REVISED

TURNING LINE: ON

No cross track error

correction at turning line

Cross track error

correction at turning line

Turning line

12. Push the right button three times to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-33

5.13.6 Displaying nav line, waypoint mark

Displaying internal nav lines

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE DATA and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose INTERNAL DATA and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE SELECT and then push the wheel or

the left button.

6. Use the wheel to enter the nav line number you want to display. Roll the

wheel to choose numeral and push it to set. Note that the same nav line no.

cannot be entered more than once.

7. To skip the next waypoint, roll the wheel to choose 2 SKIP NEXT WPT and

then push the wheel or the left button.

8. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

Displaying external nav lines

Nav lines from an external navigator can be displayed as below. RTE and WPL

sentences are necessary to display a nav line from a navigator.

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE DATA and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose EXT DATA and then push the wheel or the left

button.

5. Do the following as appropriate:

Set width (0.0-9.9 nm) of the nav line with 5 NAV LINE WIDTH.

Turn waypoint number display on or off with 4 DSP WPT NO (page 2 of NAV

LINE•WPT menu).

Set turning line with 3 TURNING LINE (page 2 of NAV LINE•WPT menu).

6. Push the right button two or three times depending on which page of the NAV

LINE•WPT menu you are using.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-34

Waypoint mark

The waypoint mark shows the location of a destination waypoint which is set on

a navigator. You may mark this location on the radar display by following the

procedure shown below.

000 010 020 030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170

180

190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330 340 350

Waypoint Mark

Waypoint mark

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [NAV LINE•WPT] and then push the wheel or the

left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 NAV LINE DATA and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose WPT MARK and then push the wheel or the left

button.

5. Push the right button twice to close the menu.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-35

[CARD (1/2)]

1 BACK

2 DRIVE SELECT

A/B/C/D*

3 [READ CARD]

4 [WR MARK]

5 [WR NAV LINE

•

WPT]

6 [WR OWN TRACK]

7 [WR TARGET TRACK]

8 [WR SETTING DATA]

9 [WR INSTALL DATA]

0 NEXT

5.14 Recording Data

The optional Card I/F Unit CU-100 is required to record or replay data. The

CU-100 has two card slots and you can connect two units, for a total of four card

slots.

5.14.1 Initializing memory (RAM) cards

Before you can use a memory (RAM) card it must be initialized. Formatting

prepares the recording surface of the card for use with the system, and deletes

all data recorded in the memory card. You can format cards you’ve used before,

however, in which case all prior information on them is erased.

1. Insert a blank memory card into the appropriate card slot in the Card I/F Unit.

Card Slot

Card I/F unit, front view

2. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [CARD] and then push the wheel or the left button.

(Note that “WR” in the CARD menu means “Write.”)

CARD menu, page 1

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 DRIVE SELECT and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate drive and then push the wheel or the

left button.

Note: If one unit is connected the drives are, from the left drive on the unit,

A=1 and B=2. In case of a second drive unit, its drives are, from the

left drive on the unit, C=1 and D=2.

A B C D

One Unit 2nd Unit

*: Drives available

are shown.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-36

[CARD (1/2)]

1 BACK

2 DRIVE SELECT

A/B/C/D*

3 [READ CARD]

4 [WR MARK]

5 [WR NAV LINE

•

WPT]

6 [WR OWN TRACK]

7 [WR TARGET TRACK]

8 [WR SETTING DATA]

9 [WR INSTALL DATA]

0 NEXT

6. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

CARD menu, page 2

7. Roll the wheel to choose 3 CARD INITIALIZE and then push the wheel or the

left button.

CARD INITIALIZE menu

8. Roll the wheel to choose 2 INITIALIZE START and then push the wheel or

the left button to initialize the card. The LED near the card flashes, the CARD

menu disappears and the message “FORMAT CARD” appears.

5.14.2 Recording data

When the memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the

latest. Further, when the memory is full you cannot enter another mark or line

unless you erase unnecessary marks, lines or track. Thus you should save

important data to a memory card so as not to lose important data.

1. Insert initialized memory card into appropriate drive in Card I/F Unit.

2. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [CARD] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

CARD menu

[CARD (2/2)]

1 BACK

2 [FILE DELETE]

3 [CARD INITIALIZE]

[CARD INITIALIZE]

1 BACK

2 INITIALIZE START

*: Available drives

shown.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-37

4. Roll the wheel to choose DRIVE SELECT and then push the wheel or the left

button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose appropriate drive and then push the wheel or the

left button.

6. Roll the wheel to choose data to record (one item among 4-9) and then push

the wheel or the left button. For example choose 4 WR MARK and then push

the wheel or the left button. The display then looks something like the one

below.

CARD WRITE menu

Note: The file name is composed of a single alphabet, the file type, and

seven digits, the file number. The file type is denoted as follows:

M: Mark

W: Waypoint, nav line

T: Own track

A: Target track

S: Setting data

I: Installation data

7. Use the wheel and the left button to enter file title. You may use up to seven

digits.

8. After entering the last digit of the file name the chosen item is recorded.

The message “WR CARD DATA” is shown during recording.

[WR MARK]

1 BACK

2 NAME (See note below.)

R0000000

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-38

[CARD (1/2)]

1 BACK

2 DRIVE SELECT

A/B/C/D*

3 [READ CARD]

4 [WR MARK]

5 [WR NAV LINE•WPT]

6 [WR OWN TRACK]

7 [WR TARGET TRACK]

8 [WR SETTING DATA]

9 [WR INSTALL DATA]

0 NEXT

5.15 Replaying Data

Video plotter data (track, marks, etc.) may be replayed on the screen. This is

useful for analyzing past data.

1. Insert memory card into the appropriate slot in an I/F card unit.

2. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [CARD] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

CARD menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 DRIVE SELECT and then push the wheel or the

left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose the drive where you inserted the memory card.

6. Push the wheel or the left button.

7. Roll the wheel to choose 3 READ CARD and push the wheel or the left

button.

READ CARD menu

8. Roll the wheel to choose the data to replay.

9. Push the wheel or the left button to replay chosen data.

The message “RD CARD DATA” is shown during playback. If you chose WR

INSTALL DATA, the prompt “POWER ON RESET” appears; turn the power off

and on again to read in installation data.

[READ CARD (1/1)]

1 BACK

2 NAME

T200304109

9 NAME

R200307318

0 NEXT

vailable drives

shown.

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-39

5.16 Deleting Files

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 6 [CARD] and then push the wheel or the left

button.

3. Roll the wheel to choose 2 DRIVE SELECT and then push the wheel or the

left button.

4. Roll the wheel to choose the appropriate drive and then push the wheel or

the left button.

5. Roll the wheel to choose 0 NEXT and then push the wheel or the left button.

CARD menu, page 2

6. Roll the wheel to choose 2 FILE DELETE and then push the wheel or the left

button.

FILE DELETE display

7. Roll the wheel to choose the file to delete and then push the wheel or the left

button.

The message “DELETE CARD DATA” appears while data is being deleted.

[CARD]

1 BACK

2 FILE DELETE

3 CARD INITIALIZE

[FILE DELETE (1/1)]

1 BACK

2 T2003410

3 W2003126

4 A20035311

5 S20030129

6 S20030118

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5-40

(This page intentionally left blank.)

6-1

6 MAINTENANCE,

TROUBLESHOOTING

Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any

electronic system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting

instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance and the longest

possible life of the equipment. Before attempting any maintenance or

troubleshooting procedure please review the safety information below.

WARNING

Do not open the equipment.

Hazardous voltage which can

cause electrical shock exists

inside the equipment. Only

qualified personnel should

work inside the equipment.

Turn off the radar power

switch before servicing the

antenna unit. Post a warn-

ing sign near the switch

indicating it should not be

turned on while the antenna

unit is being serviced.

Prevent the potential risk of

being struck by the rotating

antenna and exposure to

RF radiation hazard.

Wear a safety belt and hard

hat when working on the

antenna unit.

Serious injury or death can

result if someone falls from

the radar antenna mast.

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-2

6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance

program should be established and should at least include the items shown in

the table below.

Maintenance schedule

Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks

The LCD will in

time accumulate a

layer of dust which

tends to dim the

picture

Wipe the LCD carefully to

prevent scratching, using

tissue paper and an LCD

cleaner. To remove stubborn

dirt, use an LCD cleaner,

wiping slowly with tissue

paper so as to dissolve the

dirt. Change paper frequently

so the dirt will not scratch the

LCD.

Do not use chemical-based

cleaners to clean the LCD. They

can remove paint and markings.

When

needed

Processor unit

cleanliness

Dust and dirt may be

removed with a soft cloth.

Do not use chemical-based

cleaners to clean the processor

unit. They can remove paint and

markings.

Exposed nuts and

bolts on antenna

unit

Check for corroded or

loosened nuts and bolts. If

necessary, clean and repaint

them thickly. Replace them if

heavily corroded.

Sealing compound may be used

instead of paint. Apply a small

amount of grease between nuts

and bolts for easy removal in

future.

Antenna radiator Check for dirt and cracks on

radiator surface. Thick dirt

should be wiped off with soft

cloth dampened with fresh

water. If a crack is found,

apply a slight amount of

sealing compound or

adhesive as a temporary

remedy, then call for repair.

Do not use chemical-based

cleaners for cleaning. They can

remove paint and markings. If

you need to remove ice from the

antenna unit, use a wooden

hammer or plastic head

hammer. Crack on the unit may

cause water ingress, causing

serious damages to internal

circuits.

3 to 6

months

Terminal strips and

plugs in antenna

unit

(TECHNICIANS

only)

Open antenna cover to check

terminal strip and plug

connections inside. Also

check the rubber gasket of

antenna covers for

deterioration.

When closing antenna covers in

position, be careful not to catch

loose wires between covers and

unit.

6 months to

one year

Terminal strips,

sockets, earth

terminal on

processor unit

(TECHNICIANS

only)

Check for loose connections.

Check contacts and plugs for

proper seating, etc.

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-3

6.2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts

Parts Type Life expectancy Remarks

Antenna motor D8G-516 (24 rpm, X-band)

D8G-571 (42 rpm, X-band)

RM-7398 (21/26 rpm, S-band)

RM-7435 (21/26 rpm, S-band)

RM-9519 (45 rpm, S-band)

RM-9520 (45 rpm, S-band)

RM-9521 (45 rpm, S-band)

Gears more than

10,000 h

Wind load 100 kt

Magnetron MAF 1425B, MG4010

(X-band, 12 kW)

MG5436 (X-band, 25 kW)

MG5223F (S-band, 30 kW)

2,000 - 3,000 h

6.3 Replacing the Fuse

The fuse at the rear of the processor unit in the display unit protects the

equipment from overcurrent (overvoltage in case of AC set) and equipment fault.

If you cannot turn on the power, first check the fuse. Find the cause of the

trouble before replacing the fuse. Be sure to use the proper fuse. Use of a wrong

fuse can seriously damage the equipment and void the warranty.

WARNING

Use the proper fuse.

Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage

to the equipment or cause fire.

Ship’s mains and fuse to use

Unit Fuse to use

Processor Unit

24 VDC 20A

100-115 VAC 10A

220-230 VAC 5A

Display Unit MU-201CR

AC spec. 2A

DC spec. 5A

Display Unit MU-231CR

AC spec. 2A

DC spec. 6A

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-4

6.4 Replacement of Battery on GC Board

The battery installed on the GC (GyroCompass) Board inside the processor unit

preserves gyro data when the power is turned off. The life of the battery is about

five years. When the battery voltage is low, NG appears at the diagnostic test for

the GC Board. When this occurs, contact your dealer for replacement.

Battery on GC Board

Battery type Code number

GC board CR 1/2 8.L 000-103-769

6.5 Trackball Maintenance

If the cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the trackball as below.

1. Turn the retaining ring counterclockwise 45° to unlock it.

Retaining Ring

2. Remove the retaining ring and ball.

3. Clean the ball with a soft, lint-free cloth, and then blow carefully into the

ball-cage to dislodge dust and lint.

4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers using a

cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.

5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.

6. Replace the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted

reversely.

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-5

6.6 Easy Troubleshooting

This paragraph provides troubleshooting procedures which the user may follow

to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation, do not

attempt to check inside any unit. Any repair work is best left to a qualified

technician.

Easy troubleshooting procedures

Problem Cause Remedy

Key beep inaudible Key beep turned off

(Non-IMO type only)

Adjust key beep level on the OPERATION menu,

referring to paragraph 1.42.

Picture not updated or

picture freeze-up

Video freeze-up Turn the power off and on again to restore normal

operation.

Marks, indications and

noise appear but no

echo

Blown fuse Check for blown fuse in processor unit.

Range changed but

radar picture does not

change

Defective range key

or video freeze up

Try to hit RANGE [+] and [-] range keys (or

RANGE box) several times. (If unsuccessful,

replacement of keypad may be required in case of

the keyboard-type control unit.) If that does not

work try to turn the power off and on again to see

if the problem might be video freeze up.

Only 2 parallel index

lines when 6 lines are

wanted

Incorrect setting of

index line intervals

Incorrect setting of index line intervals. Adjust

index line interval, referring to paragraph 1.29.2.

Also, the setting for number of index of lines to

display may be inappropriate. Check the menu

setting for number of index lines, referring to

paragraph 1.29.4.

Range rings are not

displayed

Range rings turned

off

Try turning on the range rings with 0 RINGS in the

MARK menu. If they do not appear, their brilliance

may be too low. Adjust their brilliance at page 1 of

the BRILL menu.

ARPA target not

tracked correctly

Poor definition of

targets in sea clutter

Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN referring to

paragraph 1.17 and 1.18.

Tuning adjusted but

poor sensitivity

trace echo

rejector on or dirt on

radiator face

• Turn off the 2

trace echo rejector, referring to

paragraph 1.37.

• Clean the radiator face.

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-6

6.7 Advanced-level Troubleshooting

This paragraph describes how to cure hardware and software troubles which

should be carried out by qualified service personnel.

Note: This radar equipment contains complex modules in which fault diagnosis

and repair down to component level are not practicable by users.

Advanced troubleshooting

Problem Probable causes or check

points Remedy

Power turned on but radar

does not operate at all

1) Blown fuse.

2) Mains voltage/polarity

3) Power supply board

1) Replace blown fuse.

2) Correct wiring and input voltage.

3) Replace power supply board.

Brilliance adjusted but no

picture

SPU board Replace SPU board.

Antenna not rotating 1) Antenna drive

mechanism

2) Defective antenna

drive motor relay

(thermal relay K2,

200/220/380, 440/100

VAC)

1) Replace antenna drive mechanism.

2) Press relay reset button.

Data and marks not

displayed in Transmit

status

SPU board Replace SPU board.

Adjust GAIN with A/C SEA

set at minimum. Marks and

indications appear but no

noise or echo

1) IF amplifier

2) Signal cable between

antenna and processor

unit

3) Video amplifier board

1) Replace IF amplifier.

2) Check continuously and isolation of

coaxial cable.

Note: Disconnect the plug and lugs

at both ends of coaxial cable before

checking it by ohmmeter.

3) Check video coax line for secure

connection. If connection is good,

replace SPU board.

(Continued on next page)

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-7

Advanced troubleshooting (con’t)

Problem Probable causes or check

points Remedy

Marks, indications and

noise appear but no echo

(Transmission leak

representing own ship

position is absent)

1) TX fuse

2) Magnetron

3) Modulator board

4) SPU board

1) If fuse is blown, replace it. If it blows

again, the modulator or associated

circuit may be defective.

2) Check magnetron current.

Replace magnetron.

3) Replace modulator board.

4) Replace SPU board.

Picture not updated or

picture freeze-up

1) Bearing signal generator

board (in antenna unit)

2) SPU board

3) Video freeze-up

1) Check the connection of signal

cables.

2) Replace SPU board.

3) Turn off and on the radar.

Incorrect orientation of

picture

1) SPU board

2) Gyro interface

1) The message HDG SIG MISSING

appears when the heading pulse is

not received during standby.

2) Replace the gyro interface.

Cannot operate radar from

on-screen boxes

SPU Board Replace SPU Board.

Radar is properly tuned but

poor sensitivity

1) Deteriorated magnetron

2) Detuned MIC

3) Dirt on radiator face

4) Water ingress to the

waveguide or other

feeder line

5) Second trace echo

rejection is ON

1) With the radar transmitting on 48 nm

range, check magnetron current.

If current is below normal, magnetron

may be defective. Replace it.

2) Check MIC detecting current. If it is

below normal value, MIC may have

become detuned. MIC must be

tuned.

3) Clean the radiator surface.

4) Remove water from the feeder line.

5) Disable the second-trace echo

rejector referring to paragraph 1.37.

Range changed but radar

picture not changing

1) Defective range key

2) SPU board

3) Video freeze-up

1) Try to hit RANGE [+] and [-] keys

several times. If unsuccessful,

replacement of keypad may be

required.

2) Replace SPU board.

3) Turn off and on radar.

(Continued on next page)

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-8

Advanced troubleshooting (con’t)

Problem Probable causes or check

points Remedy

Interference rejector is

inoperative (interference

rejection level not

displayed)

SPU board Replace SPU board.

Echo stretch is ineffective

(neither ES1, ES2 nor ES3

is displayed)

SPU board Replace SPU board.

Range rings are not

displayed

1) Adjust the brilliance of

range rings on the

BRILL menu to see if

intensity is increased

2) SPU board

1) Replace associated circuit board if

unsuccessful.

2) Replace SPU board.

Poor discrimination in

range

Sea clutter control not

functioning properly

Improper setting of A/C SEA. If A/C SEA

is seen only at very close range,

suspect inaccurate frequency of

reference oscillator.

True motion presentation

not working correctly

1) Poor contact of MODE

key (full keyboard)

2) Selection not accessed.

3) Speed entry incorrect

4) TM display inaccurate

1) Try to press MODE key a little

harder.

2) Press MODE key or operate

PRESENTATION MODE box until TM

appears.

3) Enter correct own ship speed

referring to paragraph 1.13.

4) Make sure that speed and compass

inputs are accurate.

Target not tracked

correctly

Poor definition of targets in

sea clutter

Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN controls

referring to paragraph 1.17 and 1.18.

Buttons on trackball

module operated but no

response

Trackball module Replace trackball module.

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-9

[CUSTOMIZE•TEST]

1 BACK

2 [DATA BOX]

3 [F1]

4 [F2]

5 [F3]

6 [F4]

7 [OPERATION]

8 [TEST]

[TEST]

1 BACK

2 [SELF TEST]

3 [ARPA TEST]

6.8 Diagnostics

A diagnostic test program is provided to test major circuit boards in the control

unit, processor unit and card I/F unit. Note that the normal radar picture is lost

during this test.

Proceed as follows to execute the diagnostic test:

1. Roll the trackball to choose the MENU box and then push the left button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose 9 [CUSTOMIZE•TEST] and then push the wheel or

the left button.

CUSTOMIZE•TEST menu

3. Roll the wheel to choose 8 [TEST] and then push the wheel or the left button.

TEST menu

4. Roll the wheel to choose 2 [SELF TEST] and push the wheel or the left

button.

SELF TEST menu

5. Roll the wheel to choose 2 START and then push the wheel or the left button

to start the test.

In a few moments the results of the test are displayed and the buzzer sounds

continuously. The ROMs and RAMs of the SPU, RFC, KEYBOARD (Control

Unit), REMOTE (Trackball-only Control Unit) and CARD I/F UNIT are

checked for proper operation. OK appears for normal operation. If NG (No

Good) appears, corresponding components may be defective. Consult your

dealer. In the middle of the display the rpm of the antenna unit and various

voltages are displayed.

[SELFT TEST]

1 BACK

2 START

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-10

PROGRAM No. ROM RAM DIP SW

SPU 0359204-01.** OK OK 0000

RFC 0359202-01.** OK OK

KEY 0359203-01.** OK OK

REMOTE1 0359203-01.** OK OK

REMOTE2

CARD 0359209-01.** OK OK 0000

PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR

-12V -11.6

3.3V 3.3

5V 4.9

12V 11.6

SCANNER MOTOR 20.7

RF UNIT MONITOR

TEMPERATURE 27.3

TUNE IND 0.2

HV 174.3

R. MONITOR 1.6

MAG. CURRENT 1.5

HEATER 4.0

12V 11.9

-12V -11.8

5V 4.8

32V 38.2

TUNE OUT 0.0

TRIGGER FREQ 2273

ANT SPEED 21.6

*.**: Program Version No.

#: Installed card units are shown.

00 0 0 0 0

Self test results, keyboard test

6. The small squares and circles displayed at the bottom of screen are for

testing the control and keys on the control unit. As you operate controls and

keys, corresponding squares are highlighted, indicating that your control/key

operations are properly recognized. Numerals indicate the position of the

controls under check.

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-11

7. Press the [F1] key to change the display. The buzzer stops and the screen

shows the sentences being input to the radar, under the categories of GPS1

and GPS2 (position), speed, heading and nav data. Below is an example.

(The sentences shown depend on your system settings.)

<GPS1>

GGA

GLL

RMC

RMB

VTG

ZDA

DTM

BWR

BWC

<GPS2>

GGA

GLL

RMC

RMB

VTG

ZDA

DTM

BWR

BWC

<SPEED>

VBW

VHW

VDR

HDT

WPL

RTE

MWV

VWT

VWR

DPT

DBT

DBS

MTW

VDM

Sentence input display

8. To terminate the test, press the [F1] key.

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-12

6.9 System Messages

This sections provides all the error messages which may appear on the display

screen.

System messages

Message Alarm Meaning

Signal Missing

GYRO Continuous No bearing data

LOG Continuous No speed log data

EPFS Continuous No position data

TRIGGER Continuous No trigger signal (antenna)

VIDEO Continuous No video signal

AZIMUTH Continuous No antenna rotation signal

HEADLINE Continuous No heading signal

ARPA Alarm

COLLISION Continuous A tracked target’s CPA and TCPA fulfill criteria for

collision course

GUARD Continuous A tracked target is present in the guard zone

LOST Beep A tracked target becomes a lost target

ARPA SYSTEM

ERROR

Continuous No status data from ARPA

TARGET-FULL

(AUTO+MAN)

Continuous Capacity for automatic and manually acquired targets

has been reached

TARGET-FULL

(AUTO)

Continuous Capacity for automatically acquired targets has been

reached

TARGET-FULL

(MAN)

Continuous Capacity for manually acquired targets has been

reached

AIS Alarms

COLLISION Continuous A tracked target’s CPA and TCPA fulfill criteria for

collision course

LOST Beep A tracked target becomes a lost target

ARPA FUSION Beep ARPA and AIS target combined

RECEIVE None No status data from AIS transponder

GUARD Continuous Tracked target is inside the guard zone

CPA/TCPA Continuous CPA/TCPA cannot be calculated; Ground data (VTG, L/L)

no present

TARGET-FULL None Capacity for AIS target has been reached

AIS ALARM Continuous Alarm received from AIS transponder

(Continued on next page)

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-13

System messages (con’t from previous page)

Message Alarm Meaning

Other Alarms

DEPTH Continuous Water is shallower than preset depth

HEADING SET None Gyro re-set with MODE key

XTE Continuous Cross-track error: Ship has crossed over a nav line by a

preset range

WATCH Continuous Watchman time has elapsed

ARRIVAL Continuous Ship has arrived to a waypoint

KEY Continuous No status data from keyboard

RF Continuous No status data from antenna

Work in Progress

TUNE

INITIALIZE

None Tune initialization in progress

PM None Performance monitor is in use

USER DEFAULT None

SART None Radar is set up for SART detection

WR CARD DATA None Reading memory card

RD CARD DATA None Writing memory card

FORMAT CARD None Formatting memory card

DELETE CARD

DATA

None Deleting file from memory card

POWER ON

RESTART

None Prompt which appears after loading installation settings

from memory card.

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6-14

(This page intentionally left blank.)

P-1

APPENDIX

1. Menu Tree

Main menu (accessed by MENU key or MENU box)

1 ECHO

2 MARK

3 ALARM

(Continued on next page)

1 BACK

2 2ND ECHO REJ (OFF, ON)

3 TUNE INITIALIZE

4 PM (OFF, ON)

5 SART (OFF, ON)

6 WIPER (OFF, 1, 2)

1 BACK

2 OWN SHIP MARK (OFF, ON)

3 STERN MARK (OFF, ON)

4 INDEX LINE BEARING (REL, TRUE)

5 INDEX LINE (1, 2, 3, 6)

6 INDEX LINE MODE (VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL)*

8 EBL OFFSET BASE (STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)

9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE)

0 RING (OFF, ON)

1 BACK

2 GUARD ALARM MODE (IN, OUT)

3 GUARD ALARM LEVEL (1, 2, 3, 4)

4 WATCH ALARM (OFF, 6M, 10M, 12M, 15M, 20M)

5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL (LOW, MID, HIGH)

6 [ALARM OUT1]

7 [ALARM OUT2]

8 [ALARM OUT3]

MENU key

MENU box

1 BACK

2 (GUARD ALARM, WATCH ALARM,

GUARD ZONE, LOST TARGET, CPA

LIMIT, AUTO ACQ TARGET FULL,

MAN ACQ TARGET FULL, ARPA

SYSTEM ERROR, AZIMUTH, HEAD

LINE, TRIGGER, VIDEO, GYRO, LOG,

EPFS, XTE, ARRIVAL WPT, DEPTH)

* Appears when

5 INDEX LINE

is set for other

than "1".

APPENDIX

AP-2

4 ARPA AIS

5 PLOTTER

1 BACK

2 GUARD ZONE STAB (STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)

3 GUARD POLYGON (OFF, STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)

4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]

5 [ARPA SYMBOL]

6 [AIS SYMBOL]

7 [FUSION]

8 AIS FUNCTION (OFF, ON)

1 BACK

2 TRIAL (OFF, STATIC, DYNAMIC)

3 TRIAL SPEED RATE (0.0 kt, 0.00 kt/s, two sets)

4 TRIAL TURN RATE (0.0 kt, 0.00 kt/s, two sets)

1 BACK

2 ARPA SYMBOL COLOR (RED*, GRN, BLU, YEL,

CYA, MAG, WHT)

3 ARPA SYMBOL SIZE (SMALL, STD, LARGE)

4 PAST POSN COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU,

YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)

5 PAST POSN POINTS (5, 10)

1 BACK

2 AIS SYMBOL COLOR (RED*, GRN, BLU, YEL,

CYA, MAG, WHT)

3 AIS SYMBOL SIZE (SMALL, STD, LARGE)

4 ROT TAG LIMIT (000.1- 180.0 /min)

5 PAST POSN COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU,

YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)

6 PAST POSN POINTS (5, 10)

1 BACK

2 FUSION TARGET (OFF/ON)

3 GAP (0.000 - 0.999 (nm))

4 RANGE (0.000 - 0.999 (nm))

5 BEARING (0 - 9.9 )

6 SPEED (0.0 - 9.9 (kt))

7 COURSE (0 - 9.9 )

1 BACK

2 CHART COLOR (GRN, YEL, CYA, ORANGE, GRAY)

3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL (OFF, 10S, 30S, 1M, 2M, 3M, 6M)

4 OWN TRACK COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)

5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL (10S, 30S, 1M, 2, 3M, 6M)

6 TGT TRACK COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)

7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN (OFF, ON)

8 [DATA ERASE] 1 BACK

2 OWN TRACK (30%/50%/80%/ALL)

3 TARGET TRACK (30%/50%/80%/ALL)

4 MARK ALL ERASE

5 WP ALL ERASE

6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE

(Continued on next page)

(Continued from previous page)

*: Non-IMO only.

APPENDIX

P-3

9 [DISPLAY] 1 BACK

2 GRID (OFF, ON)

3 OWN TRACK (OFF, ON)

4 TARGET TRACK (OFF, ON)

5 MARK (OFF, ON)

6 LAND DENSITY (OFF, ON)

7 PLACE NAME (OFF, ON)

8 COAST LINE (OFF, ON)

9 CONTOUR LINE (OFF, ON)

0 NEXT 1 BACK

2 NAV LINE(MAP) (OFF, ON)

3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT (OFF, ON)

4 PROHIBITED AREA (OFF, ON)

5 BUOY (OFF, ON)

(Continued on next page)

(Continued from previous page)

6 CARD

7 NAV DATA

8 NAV LINE WPT

1 BACK

2 DRIVE SELECT (Available drives shown)

3 [READ CARD]

4 [WR MARK]

5 [WR NAV LINE WPT]

6 [WR OWN TRACK]

7 [WR TARGET TRACK]

8 [WR SETTING DATA]

9 [WR INSTALL DATA]

0 NEXT 1 BACK

2 [FILE DELETE]

3 [CARD INITIALIZE]

1 BACK

2 DEPTH (OFF, m, ft)

3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500)

4 DEPTH MARK (000 - 500 (m))

5 CURRENT (OFF, ON)

6 WIND (OFF, m/s, kt)

7 TEMP (OFF, ON)

8 DATE-TIME (OFF, UTC, LOCAL)

9 LOCAL TIME ADJ (00:00 - 13:30)

0 WPT DATA (OFF, REL, TRUE)

1 BACK

2 NAV LINE DATA (OFF, EXT DATA, INTERNAL DATA, WPT MARK)

3 NAV LINE SELECT (Enter nav line no.)

4 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM (OFF, ON)

5 NAV LINE WIDTH (0.0 - 9.9 (nm))

6 [WPT SET] 1 BACK

2 WPT NO. SELECT

3 WPT NAME

4 WPT L/L

5 CLEAR DATA

APPENDIX

AP-4

7 [WPT LIST]

8 [NAV LINE SET]

9 [NAV LINE LIST]

0 NEXT

(Continued on next page)

(Continued from previous page)

9 CUSTOMIZE

TEST

1 BACK

2 [DATA BOX]

3 [F1]

4 [F2]

5 [F3]

6 [F4]

1 BACK

2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT

3 NAV LINE NAME

4 NAV LINE ENTRY

5 CLEAR DATA

1 BACK

2 SKIP NEXT WPT

3 TURNING LINE (OFF, ON, REVISED)

4 DISP WPT NO. (OFF, ON)

5 DISP WPT NAME (OFF, ON)

1 BACK

3 NAV DATA (OFF, ON)

4 ZOOM (OFF, 2TIMES, 3TIMES)

5 ZOOM DISPLAY (

STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH, ARPA TRACK)

6 TARGET DATA (1BOX, 2BOX, 3BOX, LARGE)

1 BACK

2 [ECHO]

3 [STD KEY]

4 [ARPA AIS]

5 [OPERATION]

1 BACK

2 (PICTURE, IR, ES, EAV, NOISE

REJ, ANT SELECT, PULSE LENGTH,

A/C SEA SELECT, AUTO RAIN SELECT,

TUNE SELECT, ANT HEIGHT

SEA CONDITION, 2ND ECHO

REJ, PM, SART)

1 BACK

2 (ALARM ACK, STBY TX, HL

OFF, EBL OFFSET, MODE, OFF

CENTER, CU TM RESET, INDEX

LINE, VECTOR TIME, VECTOR

MODE, TARGET LIST, TRAIL,

BRILL, MARK, MENU, RANGE

UP, RANGE DOWN, ACQ,

TARGET DATA, TARGET CANCEL)

1 BACK

2 (DISP ARPA, DISP AIS, TARGET

DATA & ACQ, PAST POSN

INTERVAL, REF MARK, CPA

LIMIT, CPA, TCPA, GZ1, GZ2,

TARGET LIST SORT, TRIAL

MANEUVER, ARPA AIS FUSION,

AIS MESSAGE)

1 BACK

2 (ECHO COLOR, BACK COLOR,

RING, ALARM1, ALARM2, WATCH

ALARM RESET, ZOOM, MARK

DELETE, CHART ALIGN,

DISPLAY SELECT, MOB,

USER DEFAULT, TLL)

Default Programs:

F1: INT REJECT

F2: ECHO STRETCH

F3: AUTO RAIN

F4: HL OFF

APPENDIX

P-5

7 [OPERATION]

8 [TEST]

(Continued from previous page)

1 BACK

2 WHEEL DRIVE (NORMAL, REVERSE)

3 KEY BEEP** (OFF, LO, MID, HI)

6 OWN SHIP VECTOR (OFF, HDG, COURSE)

1 BACK

2 [SELF TEST]

3 [ARPA TEST]

** Not available

on IMO radar.

1 BACK

2 START

APPENDIX

AP-6

Pop-up menus of on-screen boxes

[ARPA TARGET MENU]

1 ARPA SELECT

MANUAL 100/

AUTO 25/

AUTO 50/

AUTO 75/

AUTO 100

ALL CANCEL

REF TARGET VECTOR

OFF/ON

ARPA TARGET menu

[AIS TARGET MENU]

1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS

3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE

OFF/ON

4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]

8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]

AIS TARGET menu

[HDG MENU]

1 HDG SOURCE

AD -10/SERIAL

2 GC -10 SETTING

000.0

HDG menu

[SPEED MENU]

1 SHIP SPEED

LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/

GPS/MANUAL/REF

2 MANUAL SPEED

0.0kt

3 SET DRIFT

OFF/ON

SPEED menu

OS POSN menu

[OS POSN MENU]

1 NAV AID

GPS1/GPS2/

DEAD RECKONING

2 MANUAL L/L

00 00.00 N

000 00.00 W

[TRAIL MENU]

1 TRAIL MODE

REL/TRUE

2 TRAIL GRAD

SINGLE/MULTI

4 TRAIL LEVEL

1/2/3/4

5 TRAIL RESTART

OFF/ON

6 TRAIL COPY

OFF/ON

OS TRAIL

OFF/ON

[TGT LIST MENU]

CPA/TCPA/BCR/BCT/

RANGE/SPEED

TGT LIST menu

1 SORT BY

[CURSOR MENU]

TARGET DATA & ACQ/

TARGET CANCEL/

ACQ/

REF MARK/

EBL OFFSET/

OFFCENTER/

CURSOR menu

OS TRAIL

OFF/ON

TRAIL menu

ZOOM/

MARK DELETE/

CHART ALIGN

APPENDIX

P-7

[BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]

1 BACK

2 BRG CURSOR

3 EBL

4 VRM

5 INDEX LINE

6 ARPA SYMBOL

7 AIS SYMBOL

8 L/L GRID

9 MARK

0 CHART

[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)]

1 ECHO COLOR**

YEL/GRN/

WHT/COLOR*

2 BKGD COLOR**

BLK-GRN/

BLK-RED/

BLU-CIR/

BLU/BRT-BLU

3 PANEL DIMMER

4 CHARACTER

5 CURSOR

6 ECHO

7 TRAIL

8 HL

9 RING

0 NEXT

BRILL menu, page 1

BRILL menu, page 2

[PICTURE MENU]

1 INT REJECT

OFF/1/2/3

2 ECHO STRETCH

OFF/1/2/3

3 ECHO AVERAGE

OFF/1/2/3

4 NOISE REJ

OFF/ON

5 AUTO STC

OFF/ON

6 AUTO RAIN

VIDEO CONTRAST

1/2/3/4/

A/B/C

8 [PULSE]

[PULSE MENU]

1 BACK

2 0.5NM

S1/S2

3 0.75NM

S1/S2/M1

4 1.5NM

S1/S2/M1

5 3NM

S2/M1/M2/M3

6 6NM

M1/M2/M3/L

7 12 -24NM

M2/M3/L

PICTURE menu

OFF/1/2/3/4

PULSE menu

CONDITION menu

[CONDITION MENU]

1 BACK

2 SEA CONDITION

1/2/3/4/5

3 ANT HEIGHT

5/7.5/10/15/20/25/30/

35/40/45/

more 50 m

4 STC RANGE

+00

* Not available

on IMO radar.

ANTENNA INFORMATION display

[ANT INFORMATION]

ANT NO 1

BAND : X-BAND

MODEL: 12

POS : FORE

ANT NO 2

BAND : X-BAND

MODEL: 12

POS : FORE

ANT NO 3

BAND :

MODEL :

POS :

ANT NO 4

BAND :

MODEL :

POS :

OWN RADAR NO.

Note: For default settings for each picture

setup type see paragraph 1.33.

**: Settings for brilliance sets BRILL2-BRILL4

BRILL2: ECHO COLOR: YEL

BKGD COLOR: BLK-RED

BRILL3: ECHO COLOR: YEL

BKGD COLOR: BLU-CIR

BRILL4: ECHO COLOR: YEL

BKGD COLOR: BLU

MARK menu

[MARK MENU]

1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA

2 MARK KIND

ORIGIN MARK(No.)/

ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/

MAP MARK/

WP 1~50/

WP 51~100/

WP 101~150/

WP 151~198/

OWN SHIP SHAPE

9 MAP DISPLAY

OFF/ON

0 MAP MARK COLOR*

RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/

CYA/MAG/WHT

0 DEFAULT

[CONDITION]

APPENDIX

AP-8

2. Digital Interface

Input sentences (RP Board, J4)

BWC, BWR, DBS, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLC, GLL, HDT, MTW, MWV, RMA, RMB, RMC,

RTE VBW, VDR, VHW, VTG, VWR, VWT, WPL, ZDA, !AIVDM, !AIVDO, $AIALR

Output sentences

OSD, TLL, TTM, RSD

Data reception

Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in

IEC 61162-2.

The following parameters are used:

Baud rate: 38,400 bps: HDT, !AIVDM, !AIVDO and $AIALR. All other sentences: 4800 bps

Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), Parity: none, Stop bits: 1

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Start

bit

Stop

bit

Data bits

Data sentences

Data used is shown in bold italics.

Input sentences

BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint

$--BWC, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, c--c, a*hh<CR><LF>

Checksum

Mode indicator

(see note 1)

Waypoint ID

Distance, nautical miles

Bearing, degrees true

Waypoint longitude, E/W

Bearing, degrees magnetic

Waypoint latitude, N/S

UTC of observation*

NOTE 1: Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous

D = Differential

E = Estimated (dead reckoning)

M = Manual input

S = Simulator

N = Data not valid

The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.

APPENDIX

P-9

BWR - Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line

$--BWR,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,c--c,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 9

| | | | | | | | | | | | +------ 8

| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 7

| | | | | | | | | +--+------------- 6

| | | | | | | +--+------------------- 5

| | | | | +--+------------------------- 4

| | | +-----+------------------------------- 3

| +-----+------------------------------------------- 2

+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. UTC of observation

2. Waypoint latitude, N/S

3. Waypoint longitude, E/W

4. Bearing, degrees true

5. Bearing, degrees magnetic

6. Distance, nautical miles

7. Waypoint ID

8. Mode indicator(see note)

9. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous

D = Differential

E = Estimated (dead reckoning)

M = Manual input

S = Simulator

N = Data not valid

The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.

APPENDIX

AP-10

DTM - Datum reference

$--DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | +--- 7

| | | | | | | +------ 6

| | | | | | +---------- 5

| | | | +--+------------- 4

| | +---+------------------- 3

| +------------------------- 2

+---------------------------- 1

1. Local datum W84 - WGS84

W72 - WGS72

S85 - SGS85

P90 - PE90

999 - User defined

IHO datum code

2. Local datum subdivision code

3. Lat offset, min, N/S

4. Lon offset, min, E/W

5. Altitude offset, m

6. Reference datum W84 - WGS84

W72 - WGS72

S85 - SGS85

P90 - PE90

7. Checksum

DBS - Depth below surface

$--DBS,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | +--------- 4

| | | | +--+----------- 3

| | +--+----------------- 2

+--+----------------------- 1

1. Water depth, feet

2. Water depth, m

3. Water depth, fathoms

4. Checksum

APPENDIX

P-11

DBT - Depth below transducer

$--DBT,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | +--------- 4

| | | | +--+----------- 3

| | +--+----------------- 2

+--+----------------------- 1

1. Water depth, feet

2. Water depth, m

3. Water depth, fathoms

4. Checksum

DPT - Depth

$--DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>

| | | |

| | | +----- 4

| | +--------- 3

| +------------ 2

+---------------- 1

1. Water depth relative to trancsducer, in meters

2. Offset from transeducer, in meters(see notes 1 and 2)

3. Maximum range scale in use

4. Checksum

NOTE1 "positive"=distance from transeduser to water-line.

"-"=distance from transducer to keel.

NOTE2 For IEC applications the offset should always be applied

so as to provide depth relative to the keel.

APPENDIX

AP-12

GGA - Global positioning system fix data

$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11

| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10

| | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9

| | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8

| | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7

| | | | | | | +------------------------- 6

| | | | | | +---------------------------- 5

| | | | | +------------------------------- 4

| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3

| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2

+------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. UTC of position

2. Latitude, N/S

3. Longitude, E/W

4. GPS quality indicator (see note)

5. Number of satellite in use,00-12, may be different from the number in view

6. Horizontal dilution of precision

7. Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level, m

8. Geoidal separation, m

9. Age of differential GPS data

10. Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023

11. Checksum

NOTE

0 = fix not available or invalid

1 = GPS SPS mode, fix valid

2 = differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid

3 = GPS PPS mode, fix valid

4 = Real Time Kinetic. Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers

5 = Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating integers

6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode

7 = Manual input mode

8 = Simulator mode

The GPS quality indicator shall not be a null field.

APPENDIX

P-13

GLL - Geographic position, latitude/longitude

$--GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | +------- 6

| | | | | | +--------- 5

| | | | | +----------- 4

| | | | +---------------- 3

| | +------+----------------------- 2

+---+----------------------------------- 1

1. Latitude, N/S

2. Longitude, E/W

3. UTC of position

4. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid

5. Mode indicator(see note)

6. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous

D = Differential

E = Estimated (dead reckoning)

M = Manual input

S = Simulator

N = Data not valid

The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be

set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and

D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not

be null fields.

APPENDIX

AP-14

HDT - Heading, true

$--HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>

| | |

| | +--------- 2

+----+----------- 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Checksum

MTW - Water temperature

$--MTW,x.x,C*hh<CR><LF>

| | |

| | +--------- 2

+--+----------- 1

1. Temperature, degrees C

2. Checksum

MWV - Wind speed and angle

$--MWV,x.x,a,x.x,a,A*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | |

| | | | | +--------- 6

| | | | +----------- 5

| | | +------------- 4

| | +---------------- 3

| +------------------- 2

+---------------------- 1

1. Wind angle, 0 to 359 (degrees)

2. Reference, R=relative, T=true

3. Wind speed

4. Wind speed units, K/M/N

5. Status, A=data valid, V=data invalid

6. Checksum

APPENDIX

P-15

RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information

$--RMB,A,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,A,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 13

| | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 12

| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 11

| | | | | | | | | | | +---------- 10

| | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 9

| | | | | | | | | +------------------ 8

| | | | | | | +-----+--------------------- 7

| | | | | +----+--------------------------------- 6

| | | | +--------------------------------------------- 5

| | | +-------------------------------------------------- 4

| | +------------------------------------------------------ 3

| +--------------------------------------------------------- 2

+------------------------------------------------------------ 1

1. Data status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning

2. Cross track error(see note 2) n.miles

3. Direction to steer L/R

4. Origin waypoint ID

5. Destination waypoint ID

6. Destination waypoint latitude,N/S

7. Destination waypoint longitude,E/W

8. Range to destination, n.miles(see note 1)

9. Bearing to destination, degrees true

10. Destination closing velocity, knots

11. Arrival status: A=arrival circle entered or perpendicular passed

12. Mode indicator(see note 3)

13. Checksum

NOTES

1 If range to destination exceeds 999.9 nautical miles, display 999.9.

2 If cross track error exceeds 9.99 nautical miles, display 9.99.

3 Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous

D = Differential

E = Estimated (dead reckoning)

M = Manual input

S = Simulator

N= Data not valid

The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field

shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for

A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator

and Status field shall not be null fields.

APPENDIX

AP-16

RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data

$--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 10

| | | | | | | | | | | +----- 9

| | | | | | | | | +--+------- 8

| | | | | | | | +--------------- 7

| | | | | | | +--------------------- 6

| | | | | | +------------------------- 5

| | | | +---+---------------------------- 4

| | +---+---------------------------------------- 3

| +--------------------------------------------------- 2

+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. UTC of position fix

2. Status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning

3. Latitude, N/S

4. Longitude, E/W

5. Speed over ground, knots

6. Course over ground, degrees true

7. Date: dd/mm/yy

8. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W

9. Mode indicator(see note)

10. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous

D = Differential

E = Estimated (dead reckoning)

M = Manual input

S = Simulator

N = Data not valid

The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field

shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for

A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator

and Status field shall not be null fields.

APPENDIX

P-17

RTE - Route

$--RTE,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,.....,c--c*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | +--------- 7

| | | | | +------------ 6

| | | | +----------------------- 5

| | | +---------------------------- 4

| | +-------------------------------- 3

| +----------------------------------- 2

+--------------------------------------- 1

1. Total number of messages being transmitted

2. Message number

3. Message mode:

c=complete route, all waypoints

w=working route, first listed waypoint is "FROM",

second is "TO" and remaining reset of route

4. Route identifier

5. Waypoint identifier

6. Waypoint "n" identifier

7. Checksum

VBW - Dual ground/water speed

$--VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | | +--- 11

| | | | | | | | | +----- 10

| | | | | | | | +-------- 9

| | | | | | | +----------- 8

| | | | | | +-------------- 7

| | | | | +----------------- 6

| | | | +-------------------- 5

| | | +------------------------ 4

| | +--------------------------- 3

| +------------------------------ 2

+---------------------------------- 1

1. Longitudinal water speed, knots

2. Transverse water speed, knots

3. Status: water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid

4. Longitudinal ground speed, knots

5. Transverse ground speed, knots

6. Status: ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid

7. Stern transverse water speed, knots

8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid

9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots

10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid

11. Checksum

APPENDIX

AP-18

VHW - Water speed and heading

$--VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | +--------- 5

| | | | | | +--+----------- 4

| | | | +--+----------------- 3

| | +---+----------------------- 2

+---+----------------------------- 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Heading, degrees magnetic

3. Speed, knots

4. Speed, km/h

5. Checksum

VDR - Set and drift

$--VDR,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | +--------- 4

| | | | +--+----------- 3

| | +--+----------------- 2

+--+----------------------- 1

1. Direction, degrees true

2. Direction, degrees magnetic

3. Current speed, knots

4. Checksum

APPENDIX

P-19

VTG - Course over ground and ground speed

$--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | +------- 6

| | | | | | | | +--------- 5

| | | | | | +--+----------- 4

| | | | +--+----------------- 3

| | +--+----------------------- 2

+--+----------------------------- 1

1. Course over ground, degrees true

2. Course over ground, degrees magnetic

3. Speed over ground, knots

4. Speed over ground, km/h

5. Mode indicator(see note)

6. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous

D = Differential

E = Estimated (dead reckoning)

M = Manual input

S = Simulator

N = Data not valid

The positioning system Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.

VWR - Relative (Apparent) wind speed and angle

$--VWR,x.x,a,x.x,N,x.x,M,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | +----------------------- 5

| | | | | +---+------------------------- 4

| | | +---+--------------------------------- 3

| +--+---------------------------------------------- 2

+------------------------------------------------------ 1

1. Measured wind angle relative to the vessel, 0 to 180 , left/right L/R of vessel heading

2. Measured wind speed, knots

3. Wind speed, meters/second

4. Wind speed, Km/Hr

5. Checksum

APPENDIX

AP-20

VWT - True wind speed and angle

$--VWT,x.x,a,x.x,N,x.x,M,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | +----------------------- 5

| | | | | +---+------------------------- 4

| | | +---+--------------------------------- 3

| +--+---------------------------------------------- 2

+------------------------------------------------------ 1

1. Calculated wind angle relative to the vessel, 0 to 180°, left/right L/R of vessel heading

2. Calculated wind speed, knots

3. Wind speed, meters/second

4. Wind speed, Km/Hr

5. Checksum

WPL - Waypoint location

$--WPL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | |

| | | | | +--------- 4

| | | | +------------ 3

| | +-----+---------------- 2

+-----+---------------------------- 1

1. Waypoint latitude, N/S

2. Waypoint longitude, E/W

3. Waypoint identifier

4. Checksum

ZDA - Time and date

$--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | +--------- 7

| | | | | +----------- 6

| | | | +-------------- 5

| | | +------------------ 4

| | +---------------------- 3

| +------------------------- 2

+--------------------------------- 1

1. UTC

2. Day, 01 to 31(UTC)

3. Month, 01 to 12(UTC)

4. Year(UTC)

5. Local zone hours, 00h to +-13h

6. Local zone minutes, 00 to +59

as local hours

7. Checksum

APPENDIX

P-21

$AIALR - Set alarm state

$AIALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c--c*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | |

| | | | | +----------------- 6

| | | | +----------------- 5

| | | +-------------------- 4

| | +---------------------- 3

| +------------------------- 2

+--------------------------------- 1

1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC

2. Local alarm number(identifier)

3. Alarm condition(A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded)

4. Alarm’s acknowledge state, A=acknowledged V=unacknowledge

5. Alarm’s description text

6. Checksum

!AIVDM - VHF data-link message

!AIVDM,x,x,x,a,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | +----- 7

| | | | | +----- 6

| | | | +-------- 5

| | | +------------ 4

| | +-------------- 3

| +---------------- 2

+------------------ 1

1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9

2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9

3. Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9

4. AIS channel Number

5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message

6. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5

7. Checksum

APPENDIX

AP-22

!AIVDO - UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report

!AIVDO,x,x,x,a,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | |

| | | | | | +--- 7

| | | | | +----- 6

| | | | +-------- 5

| | | +------------ 4

| | +-------------- 3

| +---------------- 2

+------------------ 1

1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9

2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9

3. Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9

4. AIS channel Number

5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message

6. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5

7. Checksum

APPENDIX

P-23

Output sentences

OSD- Own ship data

$--OSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | +--------- 10

| | | | | | | | +----------- 9

| | | | | | | +-------------- 8

| | | | | | +------------------ 7

| | | | | +--------------------- 6

| | | | +------------------------ 5

| | | +--------------------------- 4

| | +------------------------------ 3

| +--------------------------------- 2

+------------------------------------ 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Heading status: A=data valid, V=data invalid

3. Vessel course, degrees true

4. Course reference, B/M/W/R/P(see note)

5. Vessel soeed

6. Speed refereence, B/M/W/R/P(see note)

7. Vessel set, degrees true---Manually entered

8. Vessel drift(speed) ---Manually entered

9. Speed units, K(km/h) / N(Knots) / S(statute miles/h)

10. Checksum

NOTES - Reference systems(speed/course):

B = bottom tracking log

M = manually entered

W = water referenced

R = radar tracking(of fixed target)

P = positioning system ground reference

APPENDIX

AP-24

RSD - Radar system data

$RARSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 14

| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 13

| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 12

| | | | | | | | | | +------------ 11

| | | | | | | | | +---------------- 10

| | | | | | | | +-------------------- 9

| | | | | | | +------------------------ 8

| | | | | | +---------------------------- 7

| | | | | +-------------------------------- 6

| | | | +------------------------------------ 5

| | | +---------------------------------------- 4

| | +-------------------------------------------- 3

| +------------------------------------------------ 2

+---------------------------------------------------- 1

1. Origin 1 range, from own ship (see note 2)

2. Origin 1 bearing, degrees from 0 (see note 2)

3. Variable range maker 1(VRM1), range

4. Bearing line 1(EBL1), degrees from 0

5. Origin 2 range (see note 2)

6. Origin 2 bearing (see note 2)

7. VRM2, range

8. EBL2, degrees

9. Cursor range, from own ship

10. Cursor bearing, degrees clockwise from 0

11. Range scale in use

12. Range units, K/N/S

13. Display rotation (see note 1)

14. Checksum

NOTES

1 Display rotation:

C = course-up, course-over-ground up, degrees true

H = head-up, ship’s heading(center-line) 0 up

N = north-up, true north is 0 up

2 Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the stated range and bearing

from own ship and provide for two independent sets of variable range

markers (VRM) and electronic bearing lines (EBL) originating away from

own ship position.

APPENDIX

P-25

TLL - Target latitude and longitude

$--TLL,xx,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,hhmmss.ss,a,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | +--------- 8

| | | | | | | | +----------- 7

| | | | | | | +------------- 6

| | | | | | +-------------------- 5

| | | | | +-------------------------- 4

| | | +-----+------------------------------ 3

| +----+------------------------------------------ 2

+----------------------------------------------------- 1

1. Target number 00 - 99

2. Latitude, N/S

3. Longitude, E/W

4. Target name

5. UTC of data

6. Target status(see note)

7. Reference target=R,null otherwise

8. Checksum

NOTE - Target status

L = lost, tracked target has beenlost

Q = query, target in the process of acquisition

T = tracking

APPENDIX

AP-26

TTM - Tracked target message

$--TTM,xx,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 14

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 13

| | | | | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 12

| | | | | | | | | | | | +------------------- 11

| | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------- 10

| | | | | | | | | | +------------------------ 9

| | | | | | | | | +---------------------------- 8

| | | | | | | | +------------------------------- 7

| | | | | | | +----------------------------------- 6

| | | | | +--+-------------------------------------- 5

| | | | +--------------------------------------------- 4

| | +--+------------------------------------------------ 3

| +------------------------------------------------------- 2

+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. Target number, 00 to 99

2. Target distance from own ship

3. Bearing from own ship, degrees, true/relative(T/R)

4. Target speed

5. Target course, degrees true/relative(T/R)

6. Distance of closet point of approach

7. Time to CPA, min., "-"increasing

8. Speed/distance units, K/N/S

9. User data(e.g. target name)

10. Target status(see note)

11. Reference target = R, null otherwise

12. Time of data(UTC)

13. Type of acquisition A=automatic, M=manual, R=reported

14. Checksum

NOTE - Target status:

L = lost, tracked target has been lost

Q = query, target in the process of acquisition

T = tracking

APPENDIX

P-27

Serial interface – input ports

Heading sensor

Transmission rate is selectable from 4800 bps and 28.4 kbps.

LTC1535

RD-A

GND

Isolated RS485 Transceiver

Logical High: A-B> +0.2V

Logical Low: A-B< -0.2V

RD-B

Log/navigator

PC-400

RD-A

RD-B

Photo Coupler 470 ohm

This port is an opticoupler used to isolate I/F terminal on RD terminal.

Absolute maximum rating

Input

Forward current: 50 mA

Reverse voltage: 6 V

Output

Supply voltage: 16 V

High level output voltage: 16 V

Low level output current: 50 mA

APPENDIX

AP-28

Serial interface – output ports

ARPA for ECDIS

SN751178NS

RD-A

RD-B

Dual differrential

drivers and receivers

Logical High: A-B> +0.2V

Logical Low: A-B< -0.2V

Serial interface – input/output ports

Transmission rate is selectable from 4800 bps and 28.4 kbps.

Input port (RD-A, B)

LTC1535

RD-A

GND

Isolated RS485 Transceiver

Logical High: A-B> +0.2V

Logical Low: A-B< -0.2V

RD-B

Output port (TD-A, B)

LTC1535

TD-A

GND

Isolated RS485 Transceiver

Logical High: A-B> +4.0V

Logical Low: A-B> -4.0V

TD-B

APPENDIX

P-29

3. Parts Lists and Parts Location

Parts lists

Processor unit RPU-014, Control unit RCU-104/105, Display unit MU-201CR/ MU-231CR

FURUNO Model FR-21x7/28x7 Series (incl. BB series)

Unit

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

SYMBOL PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD/ REMARKS

ASSY. TYPE

PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-013

PTU Board 03P9339 AC s

ec.

03P9338 DC s

ec.

SPU Board 03P9337

HV Board HV9017

Terminal Board 03P9342

NET Board 03P9332

CONTROL UNIT RCU-014

PNL Board 03P9343

BUZ Board 03P9362

Trackball Ass

. TA4726N

CONTROL UNIT RCU-015

PNL Board 03P9344

Trackball Ass

. TA4726N

DISPLAY UNIT MU-201CR

PWR Pack RKW-12-13RE AC s

ec.

DC-DC Board 03P9359 DC s

ec.

Noise Filter CF-205A AC s

ec.

MXB-1206-33 DC s

ec.

DVI I/F Board SCBFRNB-A

INVERTER Board 201PW021-C

LCD Board 201PW023-H

LCD Unit 210NL128102AC31-02

DISPLAY UNIT MU-231CR

PCB BSM-501A

PWR Pack RKW-12-13RE AC s

ec.

DC-DC Board 03P9359 DC s

ec.

Noise Filter CF-205A AC s

ec.

MXB-1206-33 DC s

ec.

FIL Board 03P9360

INVERTER Board NA19002-4241

LCD Board NA21808

LCD Unit FLC59UXC8V-04

DVI I/F Board BSM-501A

Processor Unit RPU-013

Control Unit RCU-014

Control Unit RCU-015

Display Unit MU-201CR

Display Unit MU-231CR

2003/10

APPENDIX

AP-30

Antenna unit RSB-096/097 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827)

FURUNO Model FAR-2117(BB)/2127(BB)/2817(BB)/2827(BB)

Unit

Antenna Unit RSB-096/097

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

RF 03P9349

BP 03P9347

MD 03P9244-A FAR-2117/2817

03P9244-B FAR-2127/2827

SCANNER CHASSIS

RSB-096 24 rpm

RSB-097 42 rpm

RF MODULE

RTR-078 FAR-2117/2817

RTR-079 FAR-2127/2827

MIC ASSEMBLY

RU-9601 FAR-2117/2817

RU-9603 FAR-2127/2827

MOTOR

D8G-516 24 rpm, w/capacitor

D8G-571 42 rpm, w/capacitor

DIODE LIMITER

RU-9099

FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827

CIRCULATOR

RC-3686

FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827

PULSE TRANSFORMER

RT-9023 FAR-2117/2817

RT-9025 FAR-2127/2827

MAGNETRON

MG5241 FAR-2117/2817

MG5436 FAR-2127/2827

2003/10

APPENDIX

P-31

Antenna unit RSB-103/104/105 (FAR-2827W)

FURUNO

Model

FAR-2827W

Unit

Antenna Unit RSB-104/105

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

TB 03P9349

BP GEN 03P9347

MOTOR

D8G-516

2003/10

Transceiver unit RTR-081 (FAR-2827W)

FURUNO

Model FAR-2827W

Unit Transceiver Unit RTR-081

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

TB 03P9349

IF AMP 03P9335

PWR 03P9348

MD 03P9244

RFC 03P9346

MIC ASSEMBLY

RU-9603

MOTOR

24 rpm

TR LIMITER

RU-9290

CIRCULATOR

RC_3686

PULSE TRANSFORMER

RT-9023

MAGNETRON

MG5436

2003/10

109P0824H602

APPENDIX

AP-32

Antenna unit RSB-098/099/100/101/102 (for FAR-2137S-BB)/2837S)

FURUNO

Model

FAR-2137S(BB), FAR-2837S(BB)

Unit

Antenna Unit RSB-098/099

RSB-100/101/102

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

TB 03P9349

IF AMP 03P9335

PWR 03P9348

MD 03P9244

RFC 03P9346

SCANNER CHASSIS

RSB-098 21/26 rpm

RSB-099 21/26 rpm

RSB-100 45 rpm

RSB-101 45 rpm

RSB-102 45 rpm

RF MODULE

RTR-080

MIC ASSEMBLY

RU-9427

MOTOR

RM-7398 RSB-098/099 21/26 rpm, 200/220V, 3

RM-7435 RSB-098/099 21/26 rpm, 380/440V, 3

RM-9519

RSB-100/101/102

45 rpm, 220V, 3 , 50 Hz

RM-9520

RSB-100/101/102

45 rpm, 220V, 3 , 60 Hz

RM-9521

RSB-100/101/102

45 rpm, 440V, 3 , 60 Hz

DIODE LIMITER

RU-9426

CIRCULATOR

RC_6584S

PULSE TRANSFORMER

RT-9273

MSS MSS-7497 200/220V, 3

MSS MSS-7497A 380/440V, 3

MAGNETRON

MG5223F

2003/10

APPENDIX

P-33

Power Supply Unit PSU-007 (for FAR-2137S(-BB)/2837S

FURUNO Model PSU-007

Unit Power Supply Unit

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

HG3_DC12V

TB1

RELAY

2003/10

Antenna unit RSB-104/105 (for FAR-2837SW)

FURUNO

Model FAR-2837SW

Unit Antenna Unit

RSB-104/105

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

TB 03P9349

BP GEN 03P9347

MSS MSS-7497 200/220V, 3

MSS-7497-A 380/440V, 3

MOTOR

RM-7398 RSB-104

21 rpm: 200 V, 3

, 50 Hz

RSB-104

26 rpm: 220 V, 3 , 60 Hz

RM-7345 RSB-105 21 rpm: 380 V, 3 , 50 Hz

RSB-105

26 rpm: 440 V, 3 , 60 Hz

2003/10

APPENDIX

AP-34

Transceiver unit RTR-082 (for FAR-2837SW)

FURUNO

Model

FAR-2837SW

Unit

Transceiver Unit RTR-082

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

TB 03P9349

IF AMP 03P9335

PWR 03P9348

MD 03P9244

RFC 03P9346

MIC ASSEMBLY

RU-9427

MOTOR

TR LIMITER

TL378A

CIRCULATOR

RC_6584S or RC4910S

PULSE TRANSFORMER

RT-9273

MAGNETRON

MG5223F

2003/10

109P0824H602

APPENDIX

P-35

Parts location

Display unit MU-231CR (AC specification)

Noise Filter

(AC spec.: LF-205A

DC spec.: MXB-1206-33)

DC-DC Board 03P9359 (AC spec.)

(For DC spec., PWR Pack

RKW-12-13RE is used.)

FIL Board

(03P9360)

DVI I/F Board

(BSM-501A)

Display unit MU-231CR, rear cover removed

LCD Board

(NA21808)

Inverter Board

(NA19002-4241)

LCD Unit

FLC59YXC8V-04

Display unit MU-231CR, inner shield plate removed

APPENDIX

AP-36

Display unit MU-201CR (DC specification)

DIV I/F Board

(SCBFNRB-A)

PWR Module RKW-12-13RE (DC spec.)

(For AC spec, DC-DC Board 03P9359

is used.)

Noise Filter

(AC spec.: LF-205A

DC spec.: MXB-1206-33)

Display unit MU-201CR, rear cover removed

Inverter Board

(210PW021-C)

LCD Board

(201PW023-H)

LCD Unit

(NL128102AC31-02)

Display unit MU-201CR, inner shield plate removed

APPENDIX

P-37

Control unit RCU-014

PNL Board

(03P9343)

BUZ Board

(03P9362)

Trackball

Assy.

(TA4726N)

Control unit RCU-014, rear cover removed

Control unit RCU-015

PNL Board

(03P9344)

Trackball Assy.

(TA4726N)

Control unit RCU-015, rear cover removed

APPENDIX

AP-38

Transceiver unit RTR-078/079 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827

RFC Board

(03P9346)

RF PWR Board

(03P9348)

Circulator

RC-3686

Diode Limiter

(RU-9099)

IF Board

(03P9355)

MIC Assy.

(RU-9601 (FAR-2117/2127)

RU-9603 (FAR-2817/2827))

Transceiver unit RTR-078/079 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827), upper half

MD Board

(03P9244-A)

Magnetron

(MG5241)

Pulse Transformer

(RT-9205)

Transceiver unit RTR-078 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827), lower half

APPENDIX

P-39

MD Board

(03P9244-B)

Magnetron

(MG5436)

Pulse Transformer

(RT-9203)

Transceiver unit RTR-079 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827, lower half

Antenna unit RSB-103 (for FAR-2827W)

RF Board

(03P9349)

BP Board

(03P9347)

Motor

(DG8-516)

Antenna unit RSB-103 (for FAR-2827W)

APPENDIX

AP-40

Transceiver unit RTR-081 (for FAR-2827W)

TB Board

(03P9349)

PWR Board

(03P9348)

IF AMP

(03P9335)

MIC Assy.

(RU-9603)

TR Limiter

(RU-9290)

Circulator

(RC-3686)

RFC Board

(03P9346)

Underneath:

MD Board (03P9244)

Pulse Transformer (RT-9023)

Magnetron (MG5436)

Circulator (RU-9290)

Motor (109P0824H602)

Transceiver unit TR-081 (for FAR-2827W), cover opened

APPENDIX

P-41

Antenna unit RSB-098/099/100/101/102 (for FAR-2137S(-BB)/2837S)

TB Board

(03P9349)

Motor

RM-7398

(RSB-098/099, 21/26 rpm, 200/220V, 3

RM-7435

(RSB-098/099, 21/26 rpm, 380/440V, 3

RM-9519

(RSB-100/101/102, 45 rpm, 220V, 3

, 50 Hz)

RM-9520

(RSB-100/101/102, 45 rpm, 220V, 3

, 60 Hz)

RM-9521

(RSB-100/101/102, 45 rpm, 440V, 3

, 60 Hz)

MIC Assy.

(RU-9427)

Behind plate:

Diode Limiter

(RU-9426)

Circulator

(RC-6584S)

Behind plate

MSS-7497 Board

(200220 V)

MSS-7497-A Board

(380/440 V)

Antenna unit RSB-098/099/100/101/102 (for FAR-2137S-(BB)/2837S), cover opened

APPENDIX

AP-42

MD Board

(03P9244)

Pulse Transformer

(RT-9773)

Magnetron

(MG5223F)

RFC Board

(03P9346)

Antenna unit RSB-098/099/100/101/102 (for FAR-2137S(-BB)/2837S), cover opened

APPENDIX

P-43

Antenna unit RSB-104/105 (for FAR-2837SW)

TB Board

(03P9349)

Motor*

* RM-7398 (For RSB-104,

21 rpm, 200 V, 3

50 Hz;

For RSB-104, 26 rpm,

220 V, 3

60 Hz)

RM-7345 (For RSB-105,

21 rpm, 380 V, 3

50 Hz;

For RSB-105, 26 rpm,

440 V, 3

60 Hz)

Antenna unit RSB-104/105 (for FAR-2837SW), cover opened

MSS Board

MSS-7497 (200/220V, 3)

MSS-7497-A (380/440V, 3)

BP GEN Board

(

03P9347)

Antenna unit RSB-104/105 (for FAR-2837SW), cover opened

APPENDIX

AP-44

Transceiver unit RTR-082 (for FAR-2837SW)

IF Board

(03P9335)

RF Board

(03P9349)

RFC Board

(03P9346)

RF PWR Board

(03P9348)

MD Board

(03P9244)

Magnetron

(MG5223F)

Behind plate:

MIC Assy. (RU-9427)

Circulator (RC6584S or

RC4910S)

TR Limiter (TL378A)

Pulse Transformer

(RT-9273)

Motor

(109P0824H602)

Transceiver unit RTR-082 (for FAR-2837SW), cover opened

APPENDIX

P-45

4. Longitude Error Table (on 96 nm range scale)

The longitude lines concentrate on the north pole and south pole, namely, 1 nm is

equivalent to 1 minute at 0 degree latitude, 2 minutes at 60 degrees latitude, 3 minutes at

70 degrees latitude and so on. For this reason, a longitude error occurs on the radar display.

For example, when own ship is at 60°N and 135°E, even if the cursor indication is 62°N and

139°E, the real cursor position is deviated to the left (west) side. The table below shows the

longitude error, represented from 0° to 90° at 96 nm from the radar center (own ship).

62°N °N

60°N

135°E139°E

Real cursor position

Cursor position

indicated

LAT E

Real cursor position

Cursor position

indicated

96 nm

OS position

R: Error

Distance error in direction of longitude due to latitude

APPENDIX

AP-46

0.2256 0.4444 0.6496 0.8350 0.9950 1.1248 1.2202 1.2786 1.2980

0.21980213 0.43290201 0.632803 0.8134132 0.96923215 1.09551918 1.1884382 1.24517456 1.26402037

0.21229339 0.41810678 0.61115946 0.78556318 0.93600295 1.05790007 1.14755221 1.20224625 1.22034042

0.20316898 0.40012949 0.58486463 0.75173456 0.89565021 1.0122297 1.09793265 1.15016811 1.16737294

0.19249832 0.37910698 0.55411863 0.71218478 0.84848102 0.95885565 1.03998717 1.08933651 1.10552105

0.18036264 0.35519924 0.51915545 0.66721485 0.79485438 0.89818413 0.97406698 1.02021439 1.03525547

0.16685429 0.32858822 0.48024119 0.61716701 0.73517843 0.83067689 0.90076355 0.94332783 0.95711098

0.15207608 0.29947644 0.437672 0.56242216 0.66990732 0.7568477 0.82060477 0.85926197 0.87168229

0.13614047 0.26808546 0.39177186 0.53339693 0.59953781 0.67725844 0.73420069 0.76865661 0.77961957

0.11916876 0.2346542 0.3428901 0.44054055 0.52460545 0.59251483 0.6422089 0.67220131 0.68162348

0.10129001 0.19943707 0.29139874 0.37433139 0.44568053 0.50326182 0.54532952 0.57063015 0.57843983

0.08264056 0.16270211 0.23768966 0.30527334 0.36336372 0.41017869 0.44429984 0.46471615 0.47085389

0.06336208 0.12472888 0.18217162 0.23389198 0.27828148 0.31397386 0.33988878 0.35526538 0.35968447

0.04360137 0.0858064 0.12526714 0.16073056 0.19108136 0.21537949 0.23289096 0.24311083 0.24577764

0.02350833 0.04623087 0.0674093 0.08634588 0.10242699 0.11514595 0.1241207 0.12910605 0.13000029

0.00323737 0.0063035 0.00903844 0.01130406 0.01299309 0.01403609 0.0144058 0.0141187 0.01323356

1.2780 1.2192 1.1233 0.9933 0.8332 0.6479 0.4431 0.2249 0

1.24442563 1.18701379 1.09356117 0.96694117 0.81103484 0.3061092 0.43117887 0.21881975 0

1.20131324 1.14577786 1.05546143 0.93315023 0.78260251 0.60843159 0.41596331 0.21107193 0

1.14905813 1.09582188 1.00932899 0.89225746 0.74821409 0.58162173 0.397582 0.20171772 0

1.08805799 1.03752602 0.95551494 0.84457408 0.70813132 0.55038538 0.37617487 0.19082831 0

1.0187708 0.97133397 0.89442885 0.79046297 0.66265924 0.51496026 0.35190481 0.17848659 0

0.94174265 0.89774948 0.82653562 0.73033596 0.61214392 0.47561599 0.32495654 0.16478648 0

0.85754099 0.81733258 0.75235195 0.66465066 0.55696981 0.43265198 0.29553516 0.14983224 0

0.76681293 0.73069528 0.63744242 0.59390696 0.49755683 0.38639524 0.26386458 0.13373769 0

0.67024897 0.63849695 0.58741521 0.51864327 0.43435714 0.33719779 0.23018583 0.11662531 0

0.568584 0.54143927 0.49791741 0.43943239 0.36785173 0.28543407 0.19475522 0.09862535 0

0.46259176 0.44026091 0.40463016 0.35687717 0.29854675 0.23149802 0.15784242 0.07987479 0

0.35307892 0.3357319 0.30826343 0.2716059 0.22696965 0.17580013 0.11972833 0.06051633 0

0.2487894 0.22864776 0.20955062 0.18426754 0.15366517 0.1187643 0.08070304 0.0406973 0

0.12684572 0.11982348 0.10624302 0.09552679 0.0791912 0.04106355 0.04106355 0.02056855 0

0.01184713 0.01008727 0.008104 0.00605903 0.00411455 0.00111154 0.00111154 0.00028325 0

5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90

LAT

(nm)

IN-1

INDEX

-trace echo rejector...............................1-73

A/C RAIN ...................................................1-31

A/C RAIN adjustment

method...................................................1-30

A/C SEA adjustment

automatic ...............................................1-29

manual...................................................1-28

method...................................................1-28

A/C SEA box..............................................1-28

AIS

activating targets......................................4-4

AIS DISP box...........................................4-3

combining AIS with ARPA......................4-14

controls ....................................................4-1

detailed target data..................................4-7

disabling...................................................4-2

enabling ...................................................4-2

fusion .....................................................4-14

lost target...............................................4-12

messages, alarm messages..................4-18

messages, automatically displaying......4-18

past position display attributes ..............4-11

past position display interval .................4-10

past position display points....................4-10

received messages, manually viewing..4-17

ROT setting............................................4-13

sleeping targets .......................................4-5

symbol brilliance......................................4-8

symbol color.............................................4-9

symbol size..............................................4-9

system messages..................................4-16

target data................................................4-6

turning on/off............................................4-3

AIS DISP box...............................................4-3

ALARM ACK box ............................. 1-44, 3-24

ALARM ACK key .......................................1-44

ALARM box................................................1-43

Alarms

description .............................................1-82

output.....................................................1-84

ANTENNA box...........................................1-85

Antenna selection ..................................... 1-85

ARPA

activating, deactivating............................ 3-3

ARPA VECTOR box.............................. 3-17

automatic acquisition .............................. 3-5

controls.................................................... 3-2

CPA and TCPA...................................... 3-21

CPA and TCPA alarm acknowledgement

.......................................................... 3-22

criteria for selecting targets for tracking 3-34

factors affecting operation of.................3-36

guard zone activation............................3-23

guard zone deactivating........................3-24

guard zone reference............................3-25

guard zone shape ................................. 3-25

guard zone sleeping.............................. 3-24

guard zone stabilization ........................3-25

guard zone violation acknowledgement3-24

manual acquisition .................................. 3-7

operational warnings............................. 3-26

past position display attributes.............. 3-19

past position display interval.................3-18

past position display points................... 3-18

set and drift ........................................... 3-20

symbol brilliance....................................3-10

symbol color.......................................... 3-11

symbol description .................................. 3-9

symbol size ........................................... 3-11

target data ............................................. 3-12

target list................................................ 3-14

terminating tracking of targets.................3-6

test......................................................... 3-32

trial maneuver activation....................... 3-29

trial maneuver description..................... 3-28

trial maneuver termination ....................3-31

vector description..................................3-16

vector motion and time..........................3-17

ARPA ACQ MODE box ............................... 3-3

ARPA VECTOR box.................................. 3-17

Battery replacement....................................6-4

Bearing measurement............................... 1-37

BRILL box.................................................. 1-11

BRILL control............................................. 1-11

INDEX

IN-2

Brilliance

monitor................................................... 1-11

screen data............................................1-74

Colors ........................................................1-92

Control description ......................................1-4

Control unit ..................................................1-3

CPA LIMIT box...........................................3-21

CU/TM RESET box ...................................1-21

CU/TM RESET key....................................1-21

CURSOR DATA box ..................................1-87

CURSOR menu.........................................1-10

Dangerous target.........................................4-4

Diagnostics

ARPA .....................................................3-32

radar ........................................................6-9

system messages..................................6-12

DISPLAY MODE box.................................1-12

DRIFT box .................................................3-20

EBL

measuring bearing.................................1-37

reference ...............................................1-39

EBL box .....................................................1-38

EBL offset

assessing risk of collision......................1-40

measuring range and bearing between two

targets................................................1-42

reference for origin point .......................1-41

EBL OFFSET key ............................ 1-40, 1-42

EBL ON, EBL OFF keys ............................1-37

Echo averaging..........................................1-48

Echo stretch...............................................1-47

False echoes ...............................................2-3

Function keys

activating ...............................................1-67

programming .........................................1-67

Fuse replacement........................................6-3

GAIN box ...................................................1-27

GAIN control ..............................................1-27

Guard zone (ARPA)

activation ..................................... 3-23, 3-24

reference ...............................................3-25

shape .................................................... 3-25

sleeping................................................. 3-24

violation acknowledgement................... 3-24

Guidance box .............................................. 1-7

Gyro readout ............................................. 1-17

GZ box ...................................................... 3-23

HDG box ................................................... 1-17

HDG menu ................................................ 1-17

HL OFF box............................................... 1-60

HL OFF key............................................... 1-60

IL box......................................................... 1-53

INDEX LINE key ....................................... 1-53

Index lines

displaying, erasing ................................ 1-53

interval................................................... 1-54

mode ..................................................... 1-55

number of lines ..................................... 1-55

orientation ............................................. 1-54

reference............................................... 1-54

Interference rejector.................................. 1-32

Key beep ................................................... 1-81

Main menu .................................................. 1-5

Maintenance

trackball................................................... 6-4

Maintenance

battery replacement ................................ 6-4

fuse replacement .................................... 6-3

periodic.................................................... 6-2

MARK box................................................. 1-56

MENU box................................................... 1-6

Menu tree ................................................. AP-1

MODE key................................................. 1-18

Nav data.................................................... 1-76

Noise rejector............................................ 1-72

North marker ............................................. 1-60

OFF CENTER key .................................... 1-46

Off centering.............................................. 1-46

Origin marks

entering ................................................. 1-56

INDEX

IN-3

erasing ...................................................1-58

stabilization............................................1-58

OS POSN box ...........................................1-71

Own ship symbol ............................. 1-61, 1-91

Own ship vector.........................................1-81

PAST POSN box.............................. 3-18, 4-10

PICTURE box ............................................1-63

Picture setup

choosing ................................................1-63

restoring default.....................................1-64

user programming .................................1-65

Position ......................................................1-71

POWER switch............................................1-1

Presentation mode

choosing ................................................1-18

description .............................................1-19

PRESENTATION MODE box ....................1-18

Pulselength ................................................1-25

PULSELENGTH box .................................1-26

Quick start....................................................1-2

RACON........................................................2-8

Range

choosing ................................................1-24

measurement.........................................1-34

RANGE box ...............................................1-24

RANGE key ...............................................1-24

Range ring

on/off......................................................1-34

Reference marks .........................................3-3

SART ...........................................................2-5

Second-trace echo rejector .......................1-73

Sensitivity...................................................1-27

Set and drift ...............................................3-20

SET box .....................................................3-20

SPD box.....................................................1-22

Speed

automatic input ......................................1-22

echo-referenced input..............................3-3

manual input ..........................................1-23

SPEED menu ............................................1-22

STBY/TX key ...............................................1-1

Stern marker ..............................................1-60

System messages..................................... 6-12

Target alarm

acknowledging offending target ............ 1-44

attributes ............................................... 1-45

deactivating ........................................... 1-44

setting.................................................... 1-43

TARGET LIST box .................................... 3-14

Target trails

cancelling .............................................. 1-52

gradation ............................................... 1-50

level (afterglow)..................................... 1-52

reference ............................................... 1-49

resetting ................................................ 1-51

time........................................................ 1-50

trail copy................................................ 1-51

TCPA LIMIT box ........................................ 3-21

Text window setup..................................... 1-78

Trackball maintenance ................................ 6-4

TRAIL MODE box ..................................... 1-50

Troubleshooting

advanced................................................. 6-6

diagnostics .............................................. 6-9

easy......................................................... 6-5

TUNE box.................................................. 1-15

Tuning

automatic or manual ............................. 1-16

initializing............................................... 1-15

TX STBY box .............................................. 1-1

Video plotter

chart display ............................................ 5-9

chart land color...................................... 5-11

chart position correction........................ 5-10

cursor data correction ....................5-8, 5-10

displaying nav lines............................... 5-33

graphics on/off....................................... 5-12

initializing memory cards....................... 5-35

line entry................................................ 5-16

line erasure ........................................... 5-18

mark entry ............................................. 5-16

mark erasure ......................................... 5-18

memory card file deletion...................... 5-39

nav line deleting .................................... 5-30

nav line editing ...................................... 5-28

nav line entry......................................... 5-27

nav line list ............................................ 5-29

INDEX

IN-4

nav line setup ........................................5-31

other track plotting .................................5-14

own track plotting...................................5-13

radar map activation................................5-3

radar map mark and line erasure ............5-6

radar map marks and lines......................5-4

radar map position correction..................5-8

recording data........................................5-36

replaying data ........................................5-38

track color ..............................................5-14

track erasure..........................................5-15

waypoint editing.....................................5-23

waypoint entry by L/L input....................5-21

waypoint entry with cursor.....................5-20

waypoint erasure ...................................5-24

waypoint list...........................................5-25

waypoint name and number..................5-26

VRM box....................................................1-35

VRM ON, VRM OFF keys .........................1-35

Watch alarm .............................................. 1-75

WATCH box............................................... 1-75

Wheel drive ............................................... 1-81

Wiper......................................................... 1-90

Zoom ......................................................... 1-59

Furuno USA 9ZWRTR080 MARINE RADAR User Manual operators manual

Furuno USA Inc MARINE RADAR operators manual

Contents

operators manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation